Home

Acrobat Distiller, Job 3

1. Import EXDOTE Ares REStore Prim Print Preview Print Setup 1 C Program Files M3500 wrw 2 C Program Files M6600 wrw 3 C Program Filesi TEST wrw 4 newtest wrw Exit Figure 7 1 File Menu directory for all or part of the new workspace Password files are not created by the Workspace Wizard A default password file is loaded when the system is installed There fore new workspaces will use the same password file See Section 7 9 1 4 Password File for instructions on setting up a separate set of names and passwords If you select New Workspace or click on the New File Button a Wizard Figure 7 3 will appear and guide you through the options in setting up a new workspace The wizard will permit you to define the names and locations of all the files and databases In defining your new workspace you may use File Edit Search Yiew Read Calibration QC Tools Workspace Window Help E amp N sco rir rar cue Go rsP ecc Loo 44 4 gt Figure 7 2 Main Menu and Tool Bar Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 2 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 1 File cont d 7 1 1 Workspaces cont d any existing files and databases you wish or you may create as many new files and databases as you wish See Section 7 9 1 Properties for guidelines about sharing files and databases The Open Close
2. 7 5 1 Start Selecting Read Start will bring the Read Dosimeters Dialog Box Figure 7 21 into view Alternatively you may click on the GO Button on the toolbar This box is used to identify one or more batches of dosimeters and define which Acquisition Setup and TTPs should be used in reading the dosimeters Each numbered row represents the Load Cartridge of the same number The fields are defined as follows Group ID This column allows you to enter Group Names to identify the dosimeters you will be reading A Group Nam may be up to sixteen characters long and may be any ASCII numbers letters or the underscore character You may identify one or more groups and Read Dosimeters Read Calibration QC To Start Acquisition Setup TTP Setup Ketransiiit Figure 7 20 Read Menu one group may occupy more than one cartridge TTP This field identifies the TTP Setup to be used based on the TTP Setup Title Figure 7 25 Click on the arrow to see the list of available Setups You may select different TTPs for different Cartridges See Section 7 5 3 TTP Setup for instructions in editing TTP Setups Read Batch of Dosimeters with Cartridge Group ID DIE 1 000725 Automatic TTP v 0007258 Production v 0007258 Production Acquisition Setup Stop Comment Done Help Figure 7 21 Read Dosimeters Dialog Box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 22 8800 W
3. Choose a user to delete or modify O Action Close Help Figure 7 45 Password Maintenance Dialog Box Add a New User Ed Username E ill Password Confirm Password pe Member Of Administrators Users Cancel Help Figure 7 46 Add a New User Dialog Box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 58 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Maintenance cont d 7 9 Workspace cont d 7 9 2 Password Maintenance cont d 7 9 2 1 Add A New User cont d Username This is the name of the user it may be any combination of ASCII letters and numbers It must be at least four and no more than sixteen characters in length Note that the Username is case sensitive if you enter it with any uppercase letters here it must be used that way at all times Password This is the new user s password Passwords may be any combination of ASCII letters and numbers they must be at least four characters long and may be as long as sixteen Note that the Password is case sensitive if you enter it with any uppercase letters here it must be used that way at all times The system will permit duplicate passwords with different users Confirm Password The password must be entered here exactly as it is in the Password Field Member of The option buttons in this box will define the user s access rights Administrators have access to all password protect
4. Table 5 1 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 7 1 7 2 7 3 TABLES Page Electronics QC Values lt 2 0 paka NIKA AGA NA 5 5 Standard TTP Recommendations 6 3 Acquisition Setup for Generating Cal Cards 6 5 Acquisition Setup for Calibrating the Reader 6 8 Acquisition Setup for Calibrating Cards 6 10 Acquisition Setup for Generating Ext Cal Dosims 6 13 Acquisition Setup for Calibrating the Reader 6 16 Acquisition Setup for Calibrating Extremity Dosim6 18 Reading IPS ai avis cres 7 10 Calibration Factors by Read Mode 7 22 Electronics QC Functions 004 7 44 Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 0 12 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSION LICENSE General Information The Harshaw Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader utilizes a carbon 14 sealed radioactive source contained as a Reference Light Assembly This assembly has been approved by the U S Nuclear Regulatory Commission NRC for distribution to persons generally licensed The TLD System may be safely operated by persons not having training in radiological protection However the following information is provided so that you have a clear understanding of your requirements as a general licensee DO NOT DISCARD THIS INFORMATION Summary of Regulatory Requirements for Persons Using Devices Under a General License As a ge
5. eee eee 7 36 Generate Calibration Dosimeters Dialog Box 7 37 Reader Calibration Dialog Box 7 39 Dosimeter Calibration Dialog Box 7 43 Electronics QC Mena aaa DD awe oe 7 45 Electronics QC Test Results 7 45 Electronics QC Setup Dialog Box 7 47 Tools Menu with 8840 Algorithm 7 48 Edit Algorithm Setup Profile Dialog Box 7 49 Background Setup Dialog Box 7 50 Calculation Setup Dialog Box 7 52 Workspace Menu a 7 53 Instrument Options Dialog Box 7 53 Database Location Dialog Box 7 54 File Location Dialog Box oooooooooo o 7 55 Password File Location Dialog Box 7 56 Print Regions of Interest Dialog Box 7 56 Enter Password Dialog Box 7 57 Password Maintenance Dialog Box 7 57 Add a New User Dialog Box o o oo o 7 57 Modify User Dialog Box 7 58 Window Menu Xa kh arista 7 59 Help MENU ear ING Loewe es 7 60 WinREMS Help Home Page 7 60 About WinREMS Dialog Box 7 61 8800 Host Main Menu 00s ee eee 8 1 8800 Host Menu Structure oooooocoooooo o 8 1 View Ment e Us ios 8 2 Glow Curve Sereen ads 8 3 Expose Log View Screen 000 005 8 4 Transport Maintenance View Screen 8 5 History Queue Vie
6. Accepted highlighted records This field displays the number of dosimeters with acceptable ECC values Rejected not highlighted This field displays the number of dosimeters rejected from the group for any of the following reasons e ECC outside of the Upper and Lower Limits e dosimeter read with the wrong Mode Mean This row displays the average value of the accepted readings expressed in the units of the RCF Standard Deviation This row shows the percent standard deviation of the accepted readings Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 43 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 6 Calibration cont d 7 6 3 Dosimeter Calibration cont d PMT Noise Readings The fields in this group box provide information about all the PMT Noise Readings highlighted in the Search Response Database Results View Total This field displays the total number of PMT Noise Readings fi Dosimeter Calibration 1 Dosimeter ID 0014213 r Reading Statistics Total fro Accepted 7 Mean 477 4 Rejected E Standard Deviation a748 Mean This field displays the average value in nanocoulombs of the PMT Noise Readings o Standard Deviation This field displays the percent standard deviation of the PMT Noise Readings Reference Light Readings The fields in this group box provide information about all the Reference Light Readings highlighted in the Search Resp
7. hermo Telephone 440 248 7400 Toll Free 800 472 5656 ELECTRON CORPORATION Fax 440 349 6581 Radiation Measurement amp Protection http www thermo com rmp 6801 Cochran Road Solon OH 44139 USA Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Operator s Manual Publication No 8800 W O 0802 008 Release Date August 18 2002 Part No M 26773 Rev G THERMO ELECTRON CORPORATION ISO 9001 Quality System Certified Thermo Telephone 440 248 7400 Toll Free 800 472 5656 ELECTRON CORPORATION Fax 440 349 6581 Radiation Measurement amp Protection http www thermo com rmp 6801 Cochran Road Solon OH 44139 USA Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Operator s Manual Publication No 8800 W O 0802 008 Release Date August 18 2002 Part No M 26773 Rev G THERMO ELECTRON CORPORATION ISO 9001 Quality System Certified Publication Number 8800 W O 0802 008 Replaces and Supersedes 8800 W O 0602 007 Original Issue November 17 1998 NOTICE Thermo Electron Radiation Measurement amp Protection reserves the right to make changes to any product and does not assume any liability arising from use of any product or component described herein The information presented in this publication has been carefully checked and is believed to be reliable however no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies Furthermore the information does not convey to the user any p
8. s Manual 9 0 Index This section provides a reference to all the information in this manual in convenient alphabetical form All the menu items dialog boxes and fields in both WinREMS and the 8800 Host are described in detail in Sections 7 0 WinREMS Reference and 8 0 8800 Host Reference For the sake of simplicity individual field names are not included in this index To find information about any specific field look in this index under the dialog box name or the menu listing Subject Section 8800 Host Computer ALS plan eee RA RHA DAANG 8 4 Carrousels ci gia kanu kahabaan 8 2 1 Expose Log 004 8 1 2 General Instructions 3 3 Glow Curve an 8 1 1 History Queue 8 1 5 Initiate Dialog Box 8 3 1 Introduction a 1 3 Mode va in Rs ads 8 4 2 Auto Blank 8 4 2 3 Auto Calibration 8 4 2 1 Auto QC 2 ee eee eee 8 4 2 2 Steps for Running 8 4 2 4 RETETENCS iaa NGA bias 8 0 Setup Dialog Box 8 3 2 Shutdown a 8 2 5 Transport Maintenance 8 1 3 Update Software 8 2 6 Acquisition Setup Conditions for Calibrating Reader Tables 6 3 6 6 Calibrating Dosimeters Tables 6 4 6 7 Generating Cal Dosimeters Tables 6 2 6 5 Acquisition Setup Dialog Box Reference 25 dt 7 5 2 Tutorial a A 4 2 2 Air Supply o ooooooooooomooo 2 1 1 Algorithm
9. 1 Loaded into the Load Cartridge annealed then removed from the Unload Cartridge 2 Reloaded into the Load Cartridge exposed then removed from the Unload Cartridge 3 Reloaded into the Load Cartridge read then removed from the Unload Cartridge Steps for Running Auto Blank Refer to section 8 4 2 4 for steps on how to run the Auto Blank option The fields on the Auto Blank dialog box Figure 8 27 are described below Disable Mode Enable Mode These two radio buttons determine whether the Auto Blank dialog box is enabled or disabled The Enable Mode option must be selected to use the Auto Calibration feature If the Disable Mode option is selected then this feature cannot be used and the Blank Dosimeters are read only once in the mode displayed in the Acquisition Mode field on the WinREMS Acquisition Setup dialog box Figure 7 23 Acquisition Mode The Acquisition Modes that are selected enabled on the Auto Blank dialog box determine the types of readings that can be executed However to be executed the selected Acquisition Mode must match the Acquisition Mode field on the WinREMS Acquisition Setup dialog box Figure 7 23 Mode Options Ka Auto Calibration Auto GC Auto Blank C Disable Mode Enable Mode m Acquisition Mode TF Calibrate Reader M Read Dosimeters IV Calibrate Extremity Reader IV Read Extremity Y Anneal Dosimeters I Anneal Extremity gt Pre Anneal Dis
10. Without thermal treatments or fading correction less than 20 in 3 months With Harshaw fading correction algorithm glow curve batch deconvolution or application of preheat less than 5 in 3 months Repeatability Less than 2 variation based on one standard deviation for 10 sequential measurements at 1 mGy 100 mrad PCs Minimum detectability Less than 10 uGy 1 mrad based on 2 26 x standard deviation of 10 repeated evaluations of an unexposed dosimeter Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 2 1 Operator s Manual 2 0 Installation 2 1 Operating Requirements To perform as specified in Section 1 6 Instrument Performance Specifications the 8800 Reader must be operated within the following parameters 2 1 1 Utilities The Model 8800 Reader requires the following utilities to operate Electrical Supply selectable 100 120 volt AC 60 Hz 6 amp 220 240 volt AC 50 Hz 3 amp Nitrogen Supply Quality Purified 99 995 dry Pressure 3 0 to 7 0 kg cm 40 to 90 psi Flow Rate Internally regulated Approximate requirements Idle Mode 28 1 h 1 scfh Maximum 850 I h 30 scfh Air Supply alternate to Nitrogen If nitrogen is unavailable or prohibitively expensive you may use dry air as the heating medium We recommend that you use the Thermo Electron Corp RM amp P Model 4488 Dry Air Supply Installation instructions for this unit are contained in its manual
11. cont d Setup Info The fields in this group box identify the current TTP Title Enter a unique name of no more than sixteen alphanumeric characters in this field to serve as an identifier for each TTP Clicking on the down arrow will open a list of existing TTPs There is no limit to the number of setups you may create You cannot create a new setup by simply changing titles You must use either the New or the Copy button to create a new setup Time Temperature Profile Setup X m Setup Info Number 1 Edited by Title Production y Date Edited 05701700 Date Calibrated 06 07700 Debby m Elements Enabled W i M ii m Regions E Mo Far Cl R012 ROIS 8 a alal A bm bb lo ROI 4 Calibration Region tua m m N o o ER 8 2 2 al en nf of an o po o CO ai dan bom bomb bomb amd a o o A o part 158 o o N o o m Preheat Temperature Time Acquire 5 Temperature Rate 2 0 E M hz En Maximum Temp 3 BE Time 3 EFE Tel 0322 a a 1 3 Md 1744 al e a Anneal 0 0 5 0 3 O CI o o Temperature 300 Time CI o lel alelal ll _ sec m Calibration RCF Average Noise 0 497638 0 119062 486 962 0 502175 0 0882 488 62 il pos Awerage Light 0 52845 0 045687 410 714 0 500874
12. familiarity with the look and feel of Windows 95 or Windows NT based systems and so we will not describe standard dialog boxes such as Open File 7 1 File The selections on the File Menu Figure 7 1 all relate to the handling of files and printing of reports from WinREMS They are described in logical groups as defined by the menu structure 7 1 1 Workspaces A workspace is a set of files and databases which constitute a complete operating environment for WinREMS By using different workspaces you can operate more than one Reader from one computer or different operators can maintain totally separate databases for the same Reader Each workspace is defined in a file with the workspace name and the extension WRW This file identifies all the other files and databases that will be available when that workspace is active A Workspace Wizard is used to establish a new workspace By default when a new workspace is defined the WRW file and the other files and databases that make up a workspace are in the directory in which you installed WinREMS default is C PROGRAM FILES BICRON WINREMS It is not necessary however that all workspace files occupy this directory You may when creating a workspace specify a different amp WinREMS M3500 wrw t WinREMS M3500 wrw File Edit Search View Read Calibration QC New Workspace Ctrl h Open Workspace Ctrl O Close Workspace Save Workspace Ctrl 5 Save Workspace As
13. gauging or controlling thickness density level interface location radiation leakage or qualitative or quantitative chemical composition or for producing light or an ionized atmosphere b The general license in paragraph a of this section applies only to byproduct material contained in devices which have been manufactured or initially transferred and labeled in accordance with the specifications contained in a specific license issued pursuant to 32 51 of this chapter or in accordance with the specifications contained in a specific license issued by an Agreement State which authorized distribution of the devices to persons generally licensed by the Agreement State C Any person who acquires receives possesses uses or transfers byproduct material in a device pursuant to the general license in paragraph a of this section 1 Shall assure that all labels affixed to the device at the time of receipt and bearing a statement that removal of the label is prohibited are maintained thereon and shall comply with all instructions and precautions provided by such labels 2 Shall assure that the device is tested for leakage of radioactive material and proper operation of the on off mechanism and indicator if any at no longer than six month intervals or at such other intervals as are specified in the label however 1 Devices containing only krypton need not be tested for leakage of radioactive material and 11 Devices
14. on the toolbar This will bring up the Read Dosimeters Dialog Box Figure 7 21 4 Identify Group Enter a Group Identifier ofup to sixteen characters any ASCII numbers letters or the underscore character in the Group ID Field for Cartridge 1 If you have more than one cartridge of cards to read you may enter the same Group Identifier or a different one on as many successive lines as you need up to seven lines 5 Select Acquisition Setup Click on the arrow on the Acquisition Setup Field and select the name of the Acquisition Setup you established in Section 4 2 2 Acquisition Setup 6 Select TTP Select a TTP title for each line where you have entered a Group Assignment You may use the same TTP for all cards in the same group or you may use different TTPs on each line 7 Add Comment If you wish you may click on the Comment Button and enter a comment of any length 8 Start Read Process Click on the Start Button If the PMT and Reference Light Intervals are not set to 0 before it reads any cards the instrument will read and report the PMT Noise and Reference Light measurement While it is taking readings of any kind the glow curve is displayed on the Card Reader s monitor as it is acquired After the Reader finishes reading each card WinREMS will display the glow curves on the PC screen When reading or calibrating extremity Dosimeters on an 8800 the PC will display one element at a time in its standa
15. readings The fields on this dialog box are defined as follows ASP In this field you may select any of the ASPs you have defined on the ASP Dialog Box Figure 7 35 Win8840 Calculation Setup BSP In this field you may select any of the BSPs you have defined on the BSP Dialog Box Figure 7 36 View Click on either of these buttons to display the ASP or BSP selected in their respective fields Comments These two fields show the comments associated with the ASP and BSP Titles currently in view View ASP Neutron y Comments Known neutron and photon mixtures View BSP Pilot Plant Comments OK Cancel 30 day average Figure 7 37 Calculation Setup Dialog Box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 53 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 9 Workspace The dialog boxes accessed from this menu item Figure 7 38 enable you to modify specific attributes of the current workspace and to manage passwords Workspaces are selected and initiated under the File Menu as described in Section 7 1 1 Workspace 7 9 1 Properties From the Main Menu select Workspace Properties to bring the Workspace Properties Dialog Box Figure 7 39 into view Before the dialog box appears you will be prompted for a user name and password After a valid entry you will have access to the screen in edit mode You may use this box to modify various properties of
16. 1 3 1 4 Initiating WinREMS 0005 3 1 3 1 5 Exiting WmR EMS o cece athe aa pak AK 3 2 Silo Mt SCAN a An ols caked eee eae KA eae 3 2 32 Results DEE atada eure v s 3 3 3 3 Reader Controls s HUG pA bo ee ee aes 3 4 3 4 TLD Handling 3AA Cards Sa 2 wets ed 4G anne daeedoes e apa KIA 3 5 3 4 2 IDXTsRAD Rings and LAN aie KALASAG 3 7 3 4 3 EXT RAD Chipstrates erat ta da 3 8 Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 0 4 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS cont d Section Page An AA cated wie an whe aan emg ee 4 1 Had Expose LEDS 3 sg cause EAS Bod IAE a Bes 4 1 4 2 Data ACQUISTION x KG eS os Sates ANDAL Re eas 4 3 421 Time Temperature Profile so 5445 oerasads eau 4 3 4 2 2 Acquisition Setup sica dade Cheese Gas 4 3 4 2 3 Read DOSIMSIS S paishedo des 5Geag at Lake ves 4 6 5 0 Quality Assurance 0 0 0 0 cece eee ee 5 1 Sells DAU OA zud sre A A aes wee 5 1 5 1 1 Record Retention Hudas ot Ahad DAA eed ewes 5 1 5 1 2 Reader Operational Checks 5 2 5 1 3 Reader Calibration Factor RCF 5 2 Sad Electronics OC 45 2 ae SHR R PES oe NG 5 3 5 2 Online QC Tests EAN OR pang ad A 5 7 sga A E AA O Od a are taal 5 7 A de ao Light oco BAT AA oink aaa BA 5 7 5 2 3 Blank Dosimeters ana id ka 5 7 S24 QC Desimeters id a es 5 8 6 0 Calibration Procedures 6 1 Introduction ads Aca eee eee ete ita 6 1 611o PURPOSE ahs tee daa Ute 6
17. 2 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 3 0 General Instructions cont d 3 1 WinREMS cont d 3 1 5 Exiting WinREMS To exit from WinREMS simply click on the X Box or go to the Main Menu and click on File Exit Be sure to save your current workspace 3 1 6 Unit Scaling The Harshaw TLD Readers are capable of operating over a dynamic range of seven decades although it is seldom that one installation will use all this capability Because of the many environments in which these Readers are operated it is also necessary to report in a variety of dosimetric units It is also generally desirable to report data in numbers ranging from 1 to 1 000 In order to accomplish these three objectives simultaneously it is necessary to perform scale changes within the software There are a number of standard prefixes which are used to scale units The following table details the prefixes in most common usage prefix Abbreviation Scale pico p 10 nano n 10 micro u 10 milli m 10 kilo k 10 Mega M 108 Note that there is a potential for confusion with the use of M Lower case m is milli while upper case M is Mega Given these prefixes and scale factors the following table defines the appropriate scaling over a very wide range of values for a hypothetical response value to four significant digits calibrated in generic units gU Value gU Displayed 0 123456789 1234 gU 1 23456789 1 234 gU 12 3456789 12 34
18. 6 3 1 Prepare Dosimeters 2 Load Dosimeters into Reader Insert the exposed Dosimeters in as many positions in the Carrier Cards as you wish to calibrate generally positions 2 and 3 for Chipstrates and all four for Ringlets Load the Carrier Cards into the Reader 3 Set Reader Function From the 8800 Host Main Menu Figure 8 1 select View Glow Curves to bring up the Glow Curves View Screen Figure 8 4 4 Set TTP From the WinREMS Main Menu select Read TTP Setup to bring the Time Temperature Profile Dialog Box Figure 7 25 into view Select the TTP you wish to calibrate or set a TTP to the conditions shown in the appropriate column of Table 6 1 Be sure the only active positions correspond to the positions used in Step 2 5 Set Acquisition Parameters From the WinREMS Main Menu select Read Acquisition Setup to bring the Acquisition Setup Dialog Box in to view Figure 7 23 Set the parameters in this box to the conditions in Table 6 6 Model 8800 Automatic TLD Reader with WinREMS Page 6 16 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 6 0 Calibration Procedures cont d 6 3 Extremity Dosimeters cont d 6 3 3 Calibrate Reader cont d 6 Set Read Dosimeter Dialog Box From the WinREMS Main Menu select Read Start to bring up the Read Dosimeters Dialog Box Figure 7 21 Enter a unique Group ID Name In the TTP Field select the TTP Title that you established in Step 4 In the Acquisition Setup Field sel
19. 6 3 4 Calibrate Dosimeters Table 6 1 defines the recommended Time Temperature Profiles for all types of dosimeters based on size and material You should be familiar with the basic operating procedures of the Reader and WinREMS specifically the information in Sections 3 0 General Instructions and 4 0 Tutorial before proceeding with this section Operational details are kept to a minimum in order to focus on the calibration processes Model 8800 Automated TLD Reader with WinREMS 8800 W O 0802 Page 6 3 Operator s Manual 6 0 Calibration Procedures cont d TLD 100 TLD 200 TLD 400 TLD 500 TLD 600 TLD 700 TLD 700H TLD 700H TLD 700H LiF Mg Ti CaF Dy CaF Mn ALO C SLIF Mg Ti LiF Mg Ti LiF Mg Cu P LiF Mg Cu P LiF Mg Cu P Shape Chip Chip Chip Disc Chip Chip Chip Thickness 0 09mm 0 0036 0 9mm 0 035 0 38mm 0 015 0 9mm 0 035 0 38mm 0 015 0 38mm 0 015 0 09mm 0 0036 0 09mm 0 0036 0 2mm 0 08 0 15mm 0 006 0 15mm 0 006 0 15mm 0 006 0 4mm 0 16 0 38mm 0 015 0 38mm 0 015 0 38mm 0 015 Material PRE HEAT Teflon Temp 50 Time 0 ACQUIRE Max Temp 300 300 oe 300 300 pas 300 e 260 250 Time 23 33 30 33 ka 67 Ni 33 33 23 33 Rate 15 15 300 260 250 15 10 10 All Chips are 3 2 mm 1 8 inches square All Discs are 5 0 mm 0 20 inches diameter Table 6 1 Standard TTP Recommendations for all card mounted and extremity dosimeters in hot gas readers Model 8800 Automated TLD Reade
20. Calibrate Dosimeters 10 to 2000 picoCoulombs Varies with instrument Model 8800 Automatic TLD Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 6 19 Operator s Manual 6 0 Calibration Procedures cont d 6 3 Extremity Dosimeters cont d 6 3 4 Calibrate Dosimeters cont d 11 Get Calibration Dialog Box From the Main Menu select Calibration Dosimeter Calibration to bring the Dosimeter Calibration Dialog Box into view Figure 7 30 12 Set Calibration Parameters In the Irradiation Field enter the exposure used to irradiate the cards in Step 1 Click on the arrow in the Mark as Field and select Field Click on the Extremity Field to put a check W in the box Enter an acceptable ECC range for each chip position This value will determine the deviation from the mean 1 0 that will be considered acceptable for the Field Cards Enter it as the Upper and Lower Limits for each position for example 0 77 and 1 43 Cards which fall outside of this range will be flagged as Bad Cards on the database and cannot be used as Field Cards 13 Initiate Calculations Click on the Compute Button to calculate the ECC values All the acceptable records will be highlighted in the upper portion of the screen Note that if the Dosimeters being calibrated are not of the same specification as the Calibration dosimeters the ECCs for one or more chips may not center around 1 0 as would be the case with dosimeters with the same sp
21. Database contains the readings as they are received from the TLD Reader This includes complete glow curve and heat curve data calibration information ROI data and date and time stamp You may use a unique name for your Response Records Database or you may use the name of a Response Records Database in another workspace and share Response data among multiple Response DB ECC DB EQC DB Log DB Subject DB workspaces ECC DB The ECC Database stores the Element Calibration Coefficients ECCs of all the calibrated dosimeters in your system You may use a unique name for your database or you may use the name of an ECC Database in another workspace and share ECC data among multiple workspaces If you use a unique name for your ECC Database you will have to calibrate your Field Dosimeters in your workspace ECCs generated in another workspace will not be available to dosimeters read in your workspace If your system has more than one Reader you may share ECC data among Readers by using a common ECC Database A default database name is created as a part of each new workspace but it remains unused until you create ECCs If you are not using ECCs WinREMS still retains the name of the unused ECC database Workspace Properties Ed Print Regions of Interest Print Log Password Print Glowcurves CAPROGRAM FILES BICRON WINREMS demo ms CAPROGRAM FILES BICRON WINREMS demoims C PROGRAM FILES BICRON WINREMS dem
22. ESPONSE 3 6f ESPONSE_UNIT s n n Figure 5 Sample Configuration File Wilcox L A December 18 1992 rd 6 2 Read Dosim 17 289461 gU Bell J B December 18 1992 rd 7 2 Read Dosim 15999115 agU Swiger M D December 18 1992 rd 9 2 Read Dosim 15 405501 gU December 18 1992 PMT Noise 0 Read Dosim 0 133750 nc Figure 6 Sample ASCII Export File 3 3 Testing a New Configuration File Try the new TLDEXPT CFG configuration by taking the following steps 1 In WinREMS select Search Response Database to bring up the Search Response Database Dialog Box 2 Select a set of records to be Exported 3 With the Search Response Database Dialog Box still in view select File Export to bring the Export Response Records Dialog Box into view 4 Create a name for your test file and click on the Export Button 5 Return to Windows and use your Browser to find the test file Double click on the file name to view the file in Notepad Confirm that the file exists and that it has the fields you established Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page A 17 Operator s Manual Appendix B ASCII Export File 4 0 Response Database Specification The tables on the following pages define all the fields available for export from a WinREMS Response Database and give the information necessary to modify the format of the exported fields as desired
23. Export File 4500 6600 and 8800 Readers Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page A 8 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual Appendix B ASCII Export File 1 0 Default File cont d 1 2 Models 4500 6600 and 8800 cont d Table 2 ASCII Export File Default Format 4500 6600 and 8800 Readers Instrument Type M8800 M6600 Reader Number integer 1 to 256 TTP Number integer TTP used to read cards 1 to 10 0 for PMT and RL Readings integer One digit for each element 1 on 0 off 1 1 1 1 for PMT 8 RL character RCF and ECC PMT amp RL Readings ECC only RCF only none 0 not defined character undefined Date Card was read Time Card was read nine digits 0 for PMT amp RL Readings string twelve characters default bl character lt Blank gt Field Card Reading Anneal ECC generation Generating Calibration cards Reader Calibration Blank Card Reading PMT Noise Reading QC Card Reading Reference Light Reading Reader Calibration Re read QC Extremity Reading Blank Extremity Reading Extremity Reading Extremity Calibration Anneal Extremit float Reader Calibration Factor for Position i Format x xxxE n If RCF not applied value 1 000E 0 1 000E 0 for PMT amp RL float ECC for Position i Three digit decimal If ECC not applied value 1 000 1 000 for PMT amp RL float Raw reading value or computed exposure
24. Header Footer Captions and the Format File path and name Not all Print tabs will have all of Workspace Properties x Print Computed Exposure Print ECCs Print Electronics QC Instrument Databases Files Print Regions of Interest Print Log Print Glowcurves Password File jc Program Files Bicron WinREMS password cfg Figure 7 42 Password File Location Dialog Box Workspace Properties xi Print ECCs Print Electronics QC Print Log Instrument Databases Files Password Print Glowcurves Print Computed Exposure i i Header REGION OF INTEREST REPORT Region Of Interest Mo Ci Ci iv c Program Files Bicron WinREMS printROl cfg Footer Date Time Dosimeter ID Caption Format File Figure 7 43 Print Regions of Interest Dialog Box these fields depending on the specific requirements of the report The captions as shown in each of these boxes are designed to match the format in the default format files so they should not need to be changed unless you change the report format You may however wish to change Headers and Footers to suit specific report requirements Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 57 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 9 Workspace cont d 7 9 2 Password Maintenance The functions that are password protected in WinREMS are New Workspace EQC Setup Acquisition Setup TTP Setup Workspace P
25. Ll haa h 7 9 2 Subject Section RCF Reader Calibration Factor Daily ON nna extern ene tad 5 1 3 Methodology o oo ooooooo o 4 2 Procedure 2 0 0 0 60 cee eee 6 2 3 6 3 3 Referenc s s rinanon s bettie eats Ae 7 6 2 Read Dosimeters Procedure 00 0 eee eee 4 2 3 Reference mcin Wieden PES ek 7 5 1 Reader Firmware 8800 Host Description 1 3 Hardware Description 1 2 NG ee a e 22 Software WinREMS Description 1 4 Reader Calibration Factor see RCF Reading Dosimeters Tutorial sae Ske Mates ies 8 4 2 ING AAP 7 5 1 Reference Light ONNE OC Kap Nh Gewese 5 2 2 NRC Notice a Page 0 1 Results Screen oooooooooooo oo 3 2 Ringlets Description oooooooooo 1 5 2 Handling oo ooooomoo 3 4 3 Safety Definition of Warning Symbols Page 0 6 Search Databases Description o oooooomomoo 1 3 Reference ten AA WAS 73 Setup Reader rata See Rey ete ees 2 2 Software PC a See REM Specifications See Performance Specifications Startup REMS 2325 6 riders nds NAKA 3 1 4 Temperature Requirements 2 1 2 Time Temperature Profile see TTP TED GATAS sos ea ates KAWANG see Dosimeters TTP Time Temperature Profile Reference tota dies baw a 7 5 3 Standard Recommendations Table 6 1 A ata ocala cae oS 4 2 1 Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 9 3 Operator s
26. Note Nitrogen is highly recommended for the lowest possible background readings 2 1 2 Environment Transient Voltage We recommend that you use a commercially available surge protection device to protect the sensitive electronics of both the Reader and the controlling PC Static Electricity Protection We recommend use of an anti static mat Operating Temperature 15 C to 40 C Storage Temperature 10 C to 60 C Ambient Light Exposure Will operate satisfactorily in the presence of up to 1 000 Lux with cover on Reader Electromagnetic Interference Complies with European Community Standards EMC directive 89 336 EEC See complete statement on page 0 2 Shock Will withstand a 1 cm drop onto a concrete surface Installation Category Pollution Degree 2 normally only non conductive pollution occurs Occasionally however a temporary conductivity caused by condensation must be expected Overvoltage Category Category II Portable equipment with local level voltages Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 2 2 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 2 0 Installation cont d 2 2 Reader Setup This section describes procedures for setting up the Reader and operating the system for the first time CAUTION It is important that you follow these instructions If the equipment is installed incorrectly or used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the prote
27. Pentium Personal Computer e P5 120 processor e 32MB RAM e 4 Gigabyte Hard Drive e Serial Port COM1 available for the Reader LPT1 Parallel Port available for printer e Any PC compatible keyboard One 3 1 2 diskette drive SVGA Monitor e Windows NT 4 0 Windows 95 or Windows 98 Note that these are minimum requirements normally a pentium based PC with con siderably higher specifications is supplied 2 4 Software If you purchased a PC from Thermo Electronic Corp RM amp P as part of your system the computer is delivered with the WinREMS software installed and configured for your system In this case upon booting the computer a WinREMS icon will appear on your desktop See Section 3 1 4 Initiating WinREMS for startup instructions Your shipment will also include a CD ROM or a set of distribution diskettes for back up installation should this ever be necessary Replacement software for any WinREMS installation may be requested from your Thermo Electron Corp RM amp P service representative Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 3 1 Operator s Manual 3 0 General Instructions This section describes how to operate the WinREMS software how to load TL materials into the Reader and provides general instructions in the use of the 8800 Reader WinREMS including initiating and exiting from the system 3 1 WinREMS The Windows based Radiation Evalua
28. REMS QC Files QCCDB DAT QC Records imported from TLD NET REMS are added to the Response Record Database in the current WinREMS Workspace Importing File H Common WINREMS InputFiles REMS Ttp fmng Importing record 1 Importing record 2 Importing record 3 Importing record 4 Importing record 5 Importing record 6 Importing record 7 Importing record 8 Importing record 9 Importing record 16 Imported Records 16 Total Records 16 Figure 7 4 Import TTP Log Report Box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 4 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 1 File cont d 7 1 2 Import cont d TLD REMS EQC Files EQCDB DAT Electronics QC Records imported from TLD NET REMS are added to the Electronics QC Database in the current WinREMS Workspace TLD REMS TTP Files TTPDB DAT TTP Files imported from TLD NET REMS remain as files with the same name that they hadin TLD NET REMS To use the TTPs in the file you must change the TTP Filename in the Files Tab of the Workspace Properties Dialog Box to the imported file name See Section 7 91 3 Files TLDShell Response Files TLD Response Records imported from TLDShell are added to the Response Record Database in the current WinREMS Workspace TLDShell ECC Files ECC ECC Records imported from TLDShell are added to the ECC Database in the current WinREMS Workspace Save in a WinREMS a ex EmptyData
29. Read Dosimeters Dialog Box Figure 7 21 Enter a unique Group ID Name In the TTP Field select the TTP Title that you established in Step 5 In the Acquisition Setup Field select the Acquisition Setup established in Step 6 You may click on the Comment Button to add any comment you wish Table 6 7 8 10 Read Dosimeters Click on the Start button The Reader will begin to read the cards Close File and Exit When the Reader has completed reading all the cards click on the Done Button to close the dialog box Select Calibration Records From the Main Menu select Search Response Records to bring up the Search Response Records Database Dialog box Figure 7 8 Enter the Group ID created in Step 7 and the other fields as follows Field Entry Dosimeter Type All Acquisition Mode All TL Response Any Element Display as Standard Report Standard Reports Computed Exposure Click on the OK Button This will bring all the records in the selected group into view Highlight all the records in the group Acquisition Setup Conditions for Calibrating Extremity Dosimeters e Oa a a o o a a aay Acquisition Mode Apply Calibration Apply RCF Extremity Enabled Employee ID Disabled Export Format None PMT Noise Interval 10 PMT Noise Range Ref Light Interval 10 Ref Light Range QC Card Interval 0 QC Card Range Blank Card Interval 0 Blank Card Range Not applicable Not applicable
30. Reference 7 8 1 Blank Cards Online QC Tests oo oo 5 2 3 Page 9 1 Subject Section Calibrate Reader see Reader Calibration Factors Calibrate TLD Cards see Card Calibration Calibration Dosimeters Generation Procedure 6 2 2 6 2 3 Generation Reference 7 6 1 Calibration Methodology 6 4 Carrier Cards Description 1 5 2 1 5 3 Loading pn wa Seca oe 3 4 2 3 4 3 Caution condition definition Page 0 5 CE Marking 00 Page 0 6 Chipstrates Description resign ia 1 5 2 Handling aida o 3 4 2 Danger condition definition Page 0 5 Dosimeter Calibration Procedure 6 2 4 6 3 4 Reference 00 0002 e ee 7 6 3 Dosimeters Environmental description 1 5 1 Loading Chipstrates 3 4 3 Loading Ringlets 3 4 2 Loading TLD Cards 3 4 1 Preparation for Calibration 6 2 1 6 3 1 Whole Body description 1 5 1 DXT RAD Extremity Dosimetry System Description oo oooooooo 1 5 3 Dosimeters see Ringlets Electrical Requirements 2 1 1 Electromagnetic Interference 2 1 2 Element Correction Coefficients Calibration Cards 6 2 2 6 3 2 Field Cards 6 2 4 6 3 4 Methodology 05 6 4 1 Employee ID os ieran a a 7 5 2 European Notice 4 Page 0 2 Ex
31. Relative Response 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 gUsrem Y OK Cancel Delete Apply Help Figure 7 35 Edit Algorithm Setup Profile Dialog Box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 50 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 8 Tools cont d 7 8 1 8840 Dose Computation Algorithm cont d 7 8 1 1 ASP cont d Cs 137 Relative Response These fields define the system s response to a calibrated Cs 137 field These values are site dependent and seldom need changing after the installation is completed and the system is calibrated However it is recommended that the values be verified once per year as a QA practice Detailed instructions for generating these values are given in the Algorithm User s Manual Units In this field you may select the units in which you wish to have the algorithm report dose The available options are gU mrem and gU mSv Changes made in this field will be carried into the labels on the Dose Calibration Factor Fields Win8840 Background Setup Name Pilot Plant v 7 8 1 2 BSP Selecting BSP from the Win8840 Menu will bring up a prompt for Username and Password Upon entry of a valid name and password the Background Setup Dialog Box Figure 7 36 will appear This dialog box defines the background radiation values that will be used in calculating the dose The fields on this dialog box are defined as follows Edi
32. Save and Save As options operate the same as normal Windows functions You may make changes to a workspace after it is defined by using the Workspace Properties Dialog Box Section 7 9 1 Properties Changes made to Workspace Properties are operational as soon as they are made but are not saved permanently until the workspace is saved If you attempt to exit from WinREMS without saving changes to your workspace a dialog box will appear asking you if you wish to save your workspace 7 1 2 Import The Import File function enables you to bring files from TLD REMS NET REMS and TLDShell into WinREMS and add the data to the WinREMS database or convett it to a WinREMS file as appropriate Selecting Import from the File Menu will bring a standard Windows Open File Dialog Box into view This dialog box allows you to browse for the files you wish to import A drop down list displays the types of files that may be imported After you select the file to be imported a box will appear showing the progress of the import process Figure7 4 The specific types of files that may be imported and the disposition of the information in the files are described in the following paragraphs WinRems Workspace Wizard Workspace File Name A Workspace is a collection of Files and databases used in running WinRems You may establish multiple workspaces For different operators or for different dosimetric purposes A workspace may share some or all of
33. Screen The results screen Figure 3 1 displays the results of the TLD Reading as it is received from the Reader The information on this screen is described in the following paragraphs This center portion of this screen displays all the glow curves in solid blue with a red line to indicate the temperature of each point If Regions of Interest have been defined they are identified by vertical lines Above the glow curve area is a line of information about the dosimeter record examples from Figure 3 1 Date and time of the reading 06 12 00 13 04 48 TTP Number 1 Acquisition Mode Dosimeter ID 7015913 and Group ID Demo i Data Acquisition In a box to the left of the curve the dosimetric information is displayed The first value is the total integral expressed in the units generated by the RCF 521 9 gU if applied If no RCF was applied the integral is expressed in nanocoulombs nC If the ECC was applied in the Reading it will also be incorporated in the total integral Immediately below the total integral are the integrals for as many Regions of Interest ROD as were selected 14 23 109 6 etc expressed in the same units as the total integral Immediately below the ROIs are the ECC 0 9528 and RCF 0 4976 values if they were applied The next line shows the Intensity of the peak channel in nanoamperes 63 06 12 00 13 04 48 1 7015913 Demo 5219 gu 14 23 ROM 0 9528 ECC 0 4976 ACF 63 nA
34. TTP Signed decimal integer d 3 QUALITY_FACTOR Calculated Quality Factor TTP Floating Point decimal Yof 2 0 RCF VALUE Reader Calibration Factor TIP Floating point decimal Yof 12 753061 response in units set in RESPONSE UNIT ROI1 Integral value of ROI1 Reader Floating point decimal Yof 0 038417 response in units set in RESPONSE UNIT ROI2 Integral value of ROI2 Reader Floating point decimal Yof 0 987313 response in units set in RESPONSE UNIT RO13 Integral value of ROI3 Reader Floating point decimal Yof 3 970397 response in units set in RESPONSE UNIT Integral value of ROI4 Reader Floating point decimal 7 765934 response RESPONSE Integral value of total TL Reader Floating point decimal Yof 2 380000 in units set in RESPONSE UNIT Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W O 0802 Page A 23 Appendix B ASCII Export File ee Default RO11 LOWER LIMIT Lower Limit of ROI1 Signed decimal integer d RO11 UPPER LIMIT Upper Limit of ROI1 TIP Signed decimal integer d 50 ROI2 LOWER LIMIT Lower Limit of RO12 TIP Signed decimal integer d 51 ROI2_UPPER_LIMIT Upper Limit of ROI2 TTP Signed decimal integer d 100 RO13 LOWER LIMIT Lower Limit of RO13 TIP Signed decimal integer d 101 RO13 UPPER LIMIT Upper Limit of RO13 TIP Signed decimal integer d 150 RO14 LOWER LIMIT Lower Limit of RO14 TIP Signed decimal integer d 151 RO14 UPPER LIMIT Upper Limit of ROI4 TIP S
35. The column headings are described below Data Field Label gives the label required to identify a field for export It must be entered in the Export Configuration File exactly as shown except that the upper case is not necessary Description is a brief description of the data contained in the field Source is the original source of the information in WinREMS usually a screen name and field name Variable Type shows the format in which the data is stored in the Response Database This format directs the user to the Variable Type in Table 3 which shows the available Format options Default Format is the symbol for the Variable Type defined above Optional Format is an alternative format which calls in pre formatted options which make the exported field more human readable Example displays an example of data in both the Default and Optional Formats Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page A 18 Appendix B ASCII Export File 4 0 Response Database Specification cont d Data Field Label ALTERNATE_ID CALIBRATION_OPTIONS 0 RCF amp ECC applied 1 ECC applied 2 RCF applied 3 none O PMT or Reference Light Reading DOSIMETER_ID DOSIMETER_TYPE Type of Dosimeter 0 Unknown 1 Calibration 2 QC 3 Field 5 PMT Noise 6 Reference Light 7 Bad 8 Extremity 9 Blank 10 Extremity QC 11 Extremity Blank 12 Extremity Calibration Date Dosi
36. The details of each of the parameters in this statement are given in Section 4 0 Response Database Specification The parameters contained within square brackets are optional all others including the quotation marks are required in every format specification In the Element specific Section of the file an additional parameter is available to show the element number en for which data is to be exported flag width precision variable type en The default value for this parameter is 1 Also within the Element specific Section of the file the fields for Glow Curve and Heat Curve may carry a range specification f flag width precision variable type en range The format for the Range Specification is the value of the lower and upper ends of the range separated by a dash e g 50 150 The default value for this parameter is 1 200 Note that the Element Number must be specified when the Glow Curve and Heat Curve Ranges are specified In addition optional backslash marks 1 can be inserted in the format specification to a specify an escape sequence such as a carriage return and line feed for example d n the In specifies carriage return and line feed b specify special characters to be sent to the output such as double quote marks to enclose a variable for example MO fg Useful characters and escape sequences include n new line return amp line feed t horizontal tab f f
37. These two columns displays the date and time that the Electronics QC Test was run You may change the format of these two columns by using the Windows operating system Click on Start Settings Control Panel Regional Settings and then the Date and Time Tabs Instrument ID This column displays the Identification of the Instrument on which the test was run This ID is built into the Reader s firmware it is not the Instrument ID established in WinREMS Position The lower case Roman Numerals in this column identify the PMT and circuitry of the data on the same line Temperature oC This column displays the temperature measured at the heating jets Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 19 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 3 Search cont d 7 3 4 Electronics QC Database High Voltage This column displays the voltage measured at each photomultiplier tube 15 Volts 15 Volts These two columns display the voltage powering the analog electronics D A Reference This column displays the reference voltage of the digital to analog conversion circuit Ground This column displays is the reference potential of the analog signals Light Reading This column displays the average of the readings of constant light output from the built in reference light expressed in nanocoulombs PMT Noise This column displays the average values of the readings of the electr
38. Windows functions for arranging multiple windows on the screen The lower section of the menu lists the currently open windows Tile Yertically Close All v 1 Glow Curves 1 2 Computed Exposure 1 Figure 7 48 Window Menu Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 60 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 11 Help The Help Menu Figure 7 49 provides access to the WinREMS Help System as well as version information about the WinREMS Software System and the instrument firmware 7 11 1 Help Topics Clicking on Help Help Topics will bring the WinREMS Help Topics Dialog Box into view This is in the standard Windows Format with tabs for Contents Index and Find The Index and Find Tabs operate the same as a normal Windows system On the Contents Tab clicking on the WinREMS 8800 Icon will display icons for WinREMS 8800 Home Page and Major Sections Clicking on the Home Page Icon will bring the WinREMS 8800 Home Page into view Figure 7 50 While all the help topics can be accessed via the Major Sections listing the Home Page offers a more convenient way of finding help in this system There is a Home Button on most of the Help Screens which will lead you back to this menu There are four buttons on this menu operating as follows Acronyms This button leads to a list of acronyms that appear in various locations throughout the system Dialog Boxes and Screens This b
39. acquisition application Figure 8 15 Retransmit Results Dialog Box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 8 13 Operator s Manual 8 0 8800 Host Reference cont d 8 4 Control Functions cont d 8 2 5 Shutdown Selecting Control Shutdown will bring the Shutdown Control Dialog Box into view Figure 8 16 This box gives you the necessary warnings about shutting the 8800 Host software down and gives you an opportunity to cancel the shutdown Select OK to continue the shutdown process The box will then count down the time from ten seconds until the shutdown is completed The Windows message It is now safe to turn off your computer and a Restart Button will appear You can now turn off the power to the Reader NOTE It is important that you follow this procedure to shut the system down DO NOT turn off power to the Reader without first shutting down with the 8800 Host software Shutdown Control Cancel Help 8 2 6 Update Software This option is used when you receive a revision to the 8800 Host software Simply put the disk in the Host PC click this menu item and follow the on screen instructions to load the new revision of the 8800 Host software This function will shut down the host program and operating system PLEASE WAIT FOR THE SHUTDOWN PROCESS TO COMPLETE BEFORE TURNING OFF THE POWER TO THE INSTRUMENT Figure 8 16 Shutdown Control Dialog Box Mode
40. applied Setting the ECC requires that your dosimeters have been calibrated setting the RCF requires that your TTP has been calibrated If you set either calibration factor to be applied and the required calibration is not present the dosimeter will not be read Unread dosimeters are moved to Cartridge 8 in the Unload Carrousel Field Dosimeters are typically read with both calibration factors applied For some Acquisition Modes other than Read Dosimeters specific calibration settings are required See Table 7 2 If both RCF and ECC are applied the reported integral will be computed according to the following formula pa 2x ECC RCF where D Reported Exposure Integral Q Measured Charge in nanocoulombs ECC Element Correction Coefficient RCF Reader Calibration Factor Set Employee ID This feature is not operational in the current release of WinREMS Set Export The fields in this box enable you to export a data file in ASCII format as data is being acquired For purposes of this example set Format to None Set Quality Control Parameters These four sets of Fields are available for the purpose of checking the consistency and accuracy of the readings Each type of reading has an Interval and a Range The Interval Field sets the number of cards that will be read between a quality reading The Range Field sets the range of acceptable values for the quality reading If a reading falls outside of the acce
41. are always capitalized for example Main Menu Screen or Input File Field e Data Field Entries and Multiple Choice pop up Field Selections are enclosed in single quotes for example neutron Keyboard keys other than letters numbers and punctuation are shown enclosed in pointed brackets for example lt Ctrl gt Safety Warnings There are also conventions that are followed for safety warnings They are divided into three categories defined as follows e DANGER indicates an imminently haz ardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury DANGER NOTICES ALWAYS APPEAR IN BOLD ITALICIZED UPPER CASE LETTERS e WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which ifnot avoided could result in death or serious injury WARNING NOTICES ALWAYS APPEAR IN UPPERCASE BOLD LETTERS e CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which ifnot avoided may result in minor or moderate injury It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices CAUTION notices always appear in bold italicized letters The definition of these safety warnings is according to ANSI Z535 4 The style of the warnings bold italicized etc is SGCD RMP s In addition to the above we have added the following warning e NOTE indicates a situation which has the potential for erroneous data collection loss of electronic data or damage to equipment but which does not directly affect the safet
42. at the beginning of each batch if the Interval is not set to zero The use of QC Cards and Blank Cards is optional you may turn off this feature by entering O in this field If you do use them however and the Reader does not find one before the specified number of cards it will stop taking readings NOTE If you are reading Chipstrates or Ringlets you can not mix Dosimeter types Field OC Blank in one carrier If you do the card will be rejected Set Limits The parameters in this group box define three actions that can be taken at unusually high reading levels How you set these will depend on the level of readings you anticipate Each limit will set a flag in the database that can be viewed using the Search Function Section 7 3 1 Response Database These fields are and their corresponding flags are defined as follows Halt instrument sets a level beyond anything that would normally be expected if this level is ever exceeded the reader will sound an audible alarm and immediately stop taking readings This alarm indicates either a problem with the Reader or a dose level which may demand immediate attention The record is flagged with an h Reread same dosimeter sets a level at which the dosimeter is reread up to n times The purpose of this alarm is to ensure that all TL signal is removed from the dosimeter WinREMS creates a new record for each read up to the limit set All re read records are flagged w
43. date with the following format space at end December 02 1993 Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page A 13 Operator s Manual Appendix B ASCII Export File 2 0 Customizing The Export File Format cont d 2 2 Output Format Specification cont d Format Specifications For Export File Variables Variable Flag Width Precision Comments Type Options Options Options d Signed Left justify results Integer specifies Integer specifies If no of digits in decimal minimum no of minimum no of argument is integer Prefixes output characters printed characters printed precision output is with or sign padded with zeros O prefix zeros Prec 1 if spec is on left Prefixes output added as needed 0 is omitted or no HAH with a blank if it to get minimum integer appears Value is not is length after decimal point truncated if digits signed amp positive exceed precision no spec all spec O Prefixes output characters printed with a zero f Places a decimal Same options as Integer specifies No of digits before Floating point in the d no of digits after decimal depends on point output decimal point magnitude of decimal AAA AMM number no of digits Also same options Prec 0 if spec is after decimal as d apply omitted depends on precision s String Same options as d ame options as Integer specifies Characters in d max no of excess of precision c
44. field Otherwise it is a display field Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 8 22 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 8 0 8800 Host Reference cont d 8 4 Options cont d 8 4 2 Modes cont d 8 4 2 2 Auto QC To enable the Auto QC dialog box Figure 8 26 the Enable Mode option on this dialog box must be selected The purpose of Auto QC is to automate the process of annealing exposing and reading QC Dosimeters With this feature after the QC Dosimeters are initially loaded into the Load Cartridge they are annealed if the Pre Anneal option is selected exposed and read without further operator intervention The 8800 Host then sends the data to WinREMS and it is stored in the active Response Database Without this feature QC Dosimeters must be 1 Loaded into the Load Cartridge annealed then removed from the Unload Cartridge 2 Reloaded into the Load Cartridge exposed then removed from the Unload Cartridge 3 Reloaded into the Load Cartridge read then removed from the Unload Cartridge Steps for Running Auto QC Refer to section 8 4 2 4 for steps on how to run the Auto QC option The fields on the Auto QC dialog box Figure 8 26 are described below Disable Mode Enable Mode These two radio buttons determine whether the Auto QC dialog box is enabled or disabled The Enable Mode option must be selected to use the Auto QC feature If the Disable Mode option is selected
45. file name and path for five of the setup and configuration files that exist for a workspace Figure 7 41 You may edit these fields to change file names and locations In order to avoid potential conflicts caused by more than one program trying to use the same file at the same time you should have a unique set of files for each workspace The fields on this box are defined as follows TTP File The Time Temperature Profile TTP File stores the Reader Calibration Factors RCFs for the TLD Reader and the TTPs that you will use to read your dosimeters Section 7 5 3 TTP Setup Because the TTP File stores RCF values we strongly suggest that you do not use one TTP file for more than one Reader Acq Setup File The Acquisition Setup File stores parameters used in data acquisition Section 7 5 2 Acquisition Setup EQC Setup File This file stores the current set of Electronics Quality Control Test parameters See Section 7 7 1 2 Setup to for details on these parameters Workspace Properties Ed Print Computed Exposure PrintECCs Instrument Databases Files TTP File CAPROGRAM FILESXBICRONAWINREMS ver006T Acq Setup File C PROGRAM FILES BICRON WINREMS ver0064 Print Regions of Interest Print Electronics QC Print Log Password Print Glowcurves EGC Setup File C PROGRAM FILES BICRON WINREMS verQ06 e Chipset File fc PROGRAM FILESABICRON4WINREM5S1ver006 s Export ASCII File C Program Files Bicr
46. format specifications 8 Using Tables 2 through 5 and the lines of the old file as a guide add the proper arguments after each of the field labels Note If no format is specified the default format will be used If the Field Label is incorrect the message NOT VALID LABEL will appear in the exported file If an incorrect format specification is listed after a field label the data field may contain a question mark may appear to be nonsense or may be a listing of the format specification string depending on the nature of the error 9 Delete any of the old lines field labels that will not be used in the new Export File 10 Save this configuration file under the same name and path that existed before for example C programfiles bicron winrems tldex pt cfg Note that the use of the filenames TLDEXPT CFG and EXPORTASCEE CFG is not mandatory for the export configuration file The system will use the file named in the Export ASCII File Field of the Files Tab under Workspace Properties in WinREMS Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page A 16 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual Appendix B ASCII Export File 3 0 Tutorial cont d 3 2 Sample Configuration and Export Files An example of a new TLDEXPT CFG file is shown in Figure 5 and the resulting ASCII Export File is shown in Figure 6 ECT ID 15 15s ING DATE 3B d Y n ETER_ID 16 16s UMBER EADING_FUNCTION 10 10s n
47. gU 123 456789 123 4 gU 1234 56789 1 234 kgU 12345 6789 12 34 kgU 123456 789 123 4 kgU 1234567 89 1 234 MgU 12345678 9 12 34 MgU 123456789 123 4 MgU 1234567890 1234 MgU In any given unit three ranges are defined base unit base unit x1 000 and base unit x1 000 000 The displayed value is adjusted so that it is greater than one and less than one thousand if possible However if the range reaches the x1 000 000 level a value greater than or equal to one thousand will be displayed up to the five character limit of 99999 note that the trailing decimal point will be dropped and five digits will be displayed for values greater than 9999 Similarly if the value is less than 1 at the base unit level it will be displayed as a decimal value less than one Both these conditions are shown in the above table The following table details the unit labels for the three different scaling ranges given various calibration units as well as for the uncalibrated response unit of nanoCoulombs Base unit x1 x1000 x1000000 nanoCoulombs nC uC mC generic units gU kgU MgU milliRoentgens mR R kR millirads mrad rad krad millirems mrem rem krem microSieverts uSv mSv Sv microGrays uGy mGy Gy milliSieverts mSv Sv kSv milliGrays mGy Gy kGy Sieverts Sv kSv MSv Grays Gy kGy MGy Roentgens R kR MR Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 3 3 Operator s Manual 3 0 General Instructions cont d 3 2 Results
48. have a valid name or password you may click on the Cancel Button for access Number of PMT Noise Samples is the in view mode number of times PMT background noise In this box you can change the samples are to be taken parameters for any of the characteristics seen on the results screen Electronics QC Setup Ea i ii i min max i Temperature jo jo High Yoltage o frooo 15 Volt Supply jas 15 5 15Volt Supply 14 5 155 D A Reference 8 178 8 208 2 P y Bl ofj o in un of o o o P yi Bl Oo o mj 2 un of O S z O x H B8 Bl ofj o in 2 al mn of O o 5 of a uf om co cool Ng Ng a Sf aj un o col Sf e f mn co oo bl f no Eoi Sf aj un o cof f no Mj M ol ma o o o Ng o o M o o M o o NI a o Ng Ground 0 02 0 02 Light Reading 1 1500 Noise Reading fo 0 4 Number of Photronics Samples dm o o T El T EE NN 3 pan 00 Number of Light Reading Samples Number of Noise Reading 5amples Cancel Figure 7 33 Electronics QC Setup Dialog Box 1 y Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 48 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 8 Tools This menu item may contain one or more of a variety of accessories available in a REMS system Figure 7 34 A separate manual is available for each of these features The only feature available in the current
49. in the Search Response Database Results View Accepted This field displays the number of dosimeters accepted in generating the pending RCF value Rejected This field displays the number of dosimeters rejected from the highlighted set Dosimeters will be rejected for any of the following reasons e ifthey were not read with the correct TTP e ifthe reading date is prior to the date the TTP was edited e if the dosimeters were not read in Calibrate Reader Mode Mean These fields display the average reading in nanocoulombs of the accepted dosimeters Standard Deviation The value in this field is the percent standard deviation of the accepted readings PMT Noise Readings The fields in this group box provide information about all the PMT Noise Readings highlighted in the Search Response Database Results View Total This field displays the number of PMT Noise Readings Mean The values in this row are the average readings in nanocoulombs of the PMT Noise Readings Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 41 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 6 Calibration cont d 7 6 2 Reader Calibration cont d Standard Deviation The values in this row are the percent standard deviation of the PMT Noise Readings Reference Light Readings The fields in this group box provide information about all the Reference Light Readings highlighted in the Sea
50. is a valuable reference This manual is not intended however to be used to introduce an operator to the equipment without training This training may come from Saint Gobain Crystals amp Detectors or an experienced user You also should have the Technical Service Manual Publication No 8800 0 S with your Model 8800 Reader This manual provides troubleshooting and repair instructions and engineering drawings to help a trained service technician to properly maintain and repair the Reader In addition to these manuals you will need to review the literature supplied with the PC the printer and any other peripheral equipment which you have acquired as a part of this system Overview The manual is structured to give you the information you need to become familiar with the instrument for your initial use and to be a continuing reference as you become more familiar with the instrument and take greater advantage of its capabilities Depending on your situation with respect to the system certain sections will be more helpful than others All users should read Section 1 0 System Overview first e If you have just received your Model 8800 Reader and will be installing and starting up the system yourself you should read Section 2 0 Installation for installation instructions Section 3 0 General Instructions and 4 0 Tutorial to familiarize yourself with the general operation of the Reader Section 5 0 Quality Assurance to understand
51. line voltage setting is indicated by the numbers 100 120 220 and 240 showing in the window adjacent to the power cord input Check the existing line voltage setting If the setting does not match the available AC line voltage change it according to the following procedure A Turn the instrument power switch off and remove the IEC 320 line power cord B Open the fuse drawer and remove the fuse C Remove the Voltage Selector jumper Change its orientation so that the number matching the available line voltage is visible when the jumper is inserted D Re insert the jumper E Ifthe voltage was changed from the factory pre set value you may need to insert a fuse of a rating appropriate for the supplied voltage Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 2 3 Operator s Manual 2 0 Installation cont d 2 2 Reader Setup cont d Attach one end of the 3mm 1 8 flexible tubing to the nitrogen inlet port Remove the existing fuse Insert the correct fuse according to the following table Voltage Fuse Rating amp Type 100 120 7 amp Type 3AG SLO 220 240 4 amp Type 3AG SLO F Close the drawer and reconnect the line power cord H The monitor outlet on the back panel will have the same voltage values as the input line voltage Use only the specified monitor for this outlet I This instrument is rated 720 VA Place the Reader in its operating location To insure adequ
52. lt xXS lt OHWDOVZ QM gt N Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page A 9 Operator s Manual Appendix B ASCII Export File Table 2 ASCII Export File Default Format 4500 6600 and 8800 Readers 20 28 Repeat Fields 17 19 for positions ii iii iv successively 29 Response Unit character nC NanoCoulombs for PMT amp RL Readings mR milliRoentgens millirads millirems microSieverts microGray generic units Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page A 10 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual Appendix B ASCII Export File 2 0 Customizing The Export File Youcan customize the ASCII Export File by selecting a limited number of the data fields in the Response Database and re formatting them to fit your specific needs This customizing of the export file requires modification of the export configuration file TLDEXPT CFG 3500 5500 or EXPORTASCII CFG 4500 6600 8800 This is accomplished in two basic steps 1 Select data fields from the Response Database records which are to be included in the export file Tables 6 and 7 describe all of the data fields in the Response Database records any of which may be included in the Export File Section 2 1 Data Field Selection describes how the fields may be selected 2 Write a format specification for the data fields that have been selected for the Export File These fields can be modified by specifying the following v
53. no restrictions on the date and time the dosimeters were read After will select all readings from the date you enter up to the present time Range allows you to set start and end dates for the readings you wish to see Group ID You may enter a group ID in this field if you wish to see messages relating to one Group of readings You may also leave this field blank to access all groups Instrument ID You may enter in Instrument ID in this field to see all the messages relevant to one Reader You may also leave this field blank to see messages for all the instruments in the database Search Log Database x Date Time C No Limits After Range 12 31 00 12 00 00 PM 24317019 12 00 00 P Group ID Instrument ID Message Type all y OK Cancel Help LO Figure 7 15 Search Log Database Dialog Box Message Type This drop down list allows you to select which type of message records you wish to see Available selections are All Comment Dosimeter Rejected Instrument Error and Application Error There are three command buttons at the bottom of the Search Log Database Dialog Box Figure 7 15 operating as follows OK will perform the selection according to the criteria entered and display the results as shown in Figure 7 16 You may print or export all the selected records or a highlighted subset of the records by following the instructions in the correspondin
54. on this button will bring up the help information for the dialog box in view 7 8 1 1 ASP Selecting ASP from the Win8840 Menu will bring up a prompt for Username and Password Upon entry of a valid name and password the Algorithm Setup Dialog Box Figure 7 35 will appear This dialog box defines the calibration values for the computations in the algorithm The fields on this dialog box are defined as follows Edited by Date edited These two fields display when by whom the ASP in view was last changed using the Username entered in the Password prompt Name You may enter any name you wish to identify a profile you create Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 49 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 8 Tools cont d 7 8 1 8840 Dose Computation Algorithm cont d 7 8 1 1 ASP cont d Comments In this optional field you may enter any comment you wish to describe the nature or application of the profile you are creating Photons The model source for Photons is entered in this field The choice made here will affect the Deep Shallow and Eye Dose Calibration Factors used in the dose computation The options are General Cs137 only and M150 only The last two are used for pure fields usually in the accident range General is used for all other purposes Beta The model source for the Beta Field is entered here This choice
55. output from the built in reference light source The value should be consistent from day to day on any given channel although it will vary from channel to channel This value varies inversely with temperature by as much as 5 over the normal operating range of the instrument PMT Noise is a reading of the electronic noise generated by the photomultiplier tube it should be as low as possible but will never be zero in normal operation If any of the readings indicate a need for maintenance of the Reader you should consult the Technical Service Manual for your Reader or call a Thermo Electron Corp RM amp P service technician Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 47 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d You may also set the number of readings 7 7 QC cont d to be taken for some of the tests in the 7 7 1 Electronics QC cont d Electronics QC process Ten is generally an adequate number of readings 7 7 1 2 Setup From the Main Menu select QC Number of Photronics Samples is the Electronics QC and Setup to bring the number of times photronics readings are Electronics QC Setup Dialog Box to be taken Figure 7 33 into view Before the dialog box appears you will be prompted for a user Number of Reference Light Samples is name and password After a valid entry you the number of times Reference Light will have access to the screen in edit mode If readings are to be taken you do not
56. properly 1 Check TTP Calibration Confirm that you have a calibrated TTP with values appropriate for the type of Dosimeters being calibrated If not calibrate one as described in Section 6 3 3 Calibrate Reader 2 Prepare Ringlets Prepare and expose the Ringlets to be calibrated in accord with Section 6 3 1 Prepare Dosimeters 3 Load Cards into Reader Insert the exposed Dosimeters in all four positions two positions for Chipstrates in the Carrier Cards Load the Carrier Cards into the Reader 4 Set Reader Function From the 8800 Host Main Menu Figure 8 1 select View Glow Curves to bring up the Glow Curves View Screen Figure 8 4 5 Check TTP From the WinREMS Main Menu select Read TTP Setup to bring the Time Temperature Profile Dialog Box Figure 7 25 into view Select the TTP that you plan to use and confirm that it is correct for the Dosimeters that you are calibrating See Table 6 1 Model 8800 Automatic TLD Reader with WinREMS Page 6 18 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 6 0 Calibration Procedures cont d 6 3 Extremity Dosimeters cont d 6 3 4 Calibrate Dosimeters cont d 6 Set Acquisition Parameters From the WinREMS Main Menu select Read Acquisition Setup to bring the Acquisition Setup Dialog Box into view Figure 7 23 Set the parameters in this box to the conditions in Table 6 7 Set Read Dosimeter Dialog Box From the WinREMS Main Menu select Read Start to bring up the
57. release of WinREMS is the 8840 Dose Computation Algorithm 7 8 1 8840 Dose Computation Algorithm From the Main Menu select Tools Whole Body Algorithm and Win8840 to display the Win8840 Algorithm Menu From this menu you may select the following options e ASP Algorithm Setup Profile e BSP Background Setup Profile e CSP Calculation Setup Profile All three of these dialog boxes are password protected If you enter an unacceptable name password combination or omit either the name or password the dialog box will appear in view mode You will be able to see the data but you will not be able to edit any of the values This subsection describes the operation of the screens available in WinREMS For complete details about the algorithm and its computations please refer to the Type 8840 Dose Computation Algorithm User s Manual Common Fields At the bottom of each of these three dialog boxes are some or all of the following command buttons OK Clicking on this button will save the new profile and close the dialog box Tools Workspace Window Help Whole Body Algorithms Figure 7 34 Tools Menu with 8840 Algorithm Cancel Clicking on this button will delete changes made but not saved in this dialog box Delete Clicking on this dialog box will delete the current profile from memory Apply Clicking on this button will save the profile currently in view without closing the dialog box Help Clicking
58. the initial set up and connection of the units which make up the workstation Section 3 0 General Instructions provides general instructions on the operation of the Reader and WinREMS Section 4 0 Tutorial contains detailed instructions for the Reader and PC for certain common procedures Section 5 0 Quality Assurance provides instructions in the operation of the Daily QA programs that help maintain a regular record of the condition of your Reader Section 6 0 Calibration Procedures describes the three procedures necessary for generating Calibration Cards calibrating the Reader and calibrating the Field Cards This section also includes a discussion of the calibration methodology Section 7 0 WinREMS Reference provides detailed descriptions and limitations for every option in the WinREMS software Section 8 0 8800 Host Reference describes the user interface built into the Reader including a detailed description of all menu items and illustrations of all screens Section 9 0 Index provides a reference to specific topics throughout the manual The Appendix contains four documents The first is a software troubleshooting form fill the top of this out as part of your initial setup The second explains the ASCII Export function which may require some programming expertise to use The third document explains the procedure for generating the Multipoint Calibration coefficients The last document is a copy of CFR 31 5 the NR
59. the name of the current View Screen as determined by the View option on the Main Menu The second bar is the 8800 Host Main Menu It contains five options each of which leads to a submenu of additional options related to the Main Menu item The complete menu structure is displayed in Figure 8 2 The third bar is a tool bar with a printer icon You can click this icon to open the standard Windows Print Dialog Box There are also icons for controlling the Load and Unload Cartridges In some of the figures in this section an area is highlighted for emphasis while the surrounding area is shaded Your screen may appear different from the illustrations in this respect 1 18 114 14 M M4 M Figure 8 1 8800 Host Main Menu Control Date Time Retransmit Results View Expose Log Transport Maintenance Activity Log History Queue Shutdown Update Software Print Print Setup Print Preview Password Maintenance Expose Initiate Setup Options Alerts Modes Help Help Topics Revision Log About Model 8800 Figure 8 2 8800 Host Menu Structure Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 8 2 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 8 0 8800 Host Reference cont d 8 1 View Screens There are five kinds of view screens that can be viewed on the 8800 Host monitor as shown in Figure 8 3 They are called view screens because they fill the entire view screen Other information appears as dialo
60. toolbar This brings the Enter Password Dialog Box Figure 7 44 into view Entering a valid User Name and Password allow you access to the Time Temperature Profile Setup Dialog Box in edit mode view Figure 7 25 The settings in this box will determine how long and to what temperature your dosimeters will be heated 2 Select TTP Click on the arrow in the Title Field to review a list of available TTPs select the one appropriate for your needs If you are reading Chipstrates be sure to select a TTP that heats only positions 11 and iti 3 Edit TTP Review the TTP to confirm that it is appropriate for the dosimeters you have to read Table 6 1 Remember that any changes to the Preheat and Acquire segments will change a calibrated TTP to uncalibrated Those fields which you may change without affecting the calibration are the Title Regions of Interest roil roi2 etc Anneal Temperature and Anneal Time See Section 7 5 3 TTP Setup for a detailed description of each field on this screen At any time before exiting from a TTP you may remove any changes made during the current editing session by clicking on the Cancel Button 4 Save and Return After reviewing the TTP and making any necessary changes click on OK to save the changes 4 2 2 Acquisition Setup 1 Get Acquisition Setup Dialog Box From the WinREMS Main Menu select Read Acquisition Setup or click on the ACQ Button on the tool bar This will bring
61. 0 and 8800 Readers A 7 4 Default ASCII Export File 4500 6600 and 8800 Readers A 8 4 Sample Configuration File 0 0 0 0 ec eee A 15 5 Sample ASCII Export File see Sy hse elena hee PNG ayia lated A 15 TABLES Table Page 1 ASCII Export File Default Format 3500 and 5500 Readers A 6 2 ASCII Export File Default Format 4500 6600 and 8800 Readers A 6 3 Format Codes For Variable Types 2 0 mia aaa vieiedaat cee tes A 13 4 Date Specification Options pst E PRAAN AG A 14 5 Time Specification Options a a GL oan pawn eA wee ee A 14 6 Response Database Common Section Data Fields A 18 7 Response Database Element specific Section Data Fields A 21 Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page A 5 Operator s Manual Appendix B ASCII Export File 1 0 Default File An ASCII file may be exported from WinREMS as the Reader is reading ENT_TYPE S 16 16s N R O TE I G D A i R sY2m d dosimeters or by selecting a group of records R SHSMBS from the Response Database See Section 7 5 2 Acquisition Setupfor instructions for the EL real time export or Section 7 3 1 Response R Database for instructions on selecting a set of a a records from the database for export The SE UNIT gs ping o ii dialog box Figure 1 Default Export File Configuration F
62. 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 5 Read cont d 7 5 1 Start cont d In addition to the Titles of the available TTPs the list for this field also contains Automatic TTP If you select this option all dosimeters will be read with the TTP with which they were calibrated If the Reader encounters an uncalibrated dosimeter it will reject it Note that this option does not work with Extremity Dosimeters Acquisition Setup This field identifies the Acquisition Setup to be used based on the Acquisition Setup Title Figure 7 23 Click on the arrow to see the list of available Setups See Section 7 5 2 Acquisition Setup for instructions in editing Acquisition Setups Start Clicking on this button will initiate the read process If you have set the Interval for PMT Noise and Reference Light Readings at a value greater than zero they will be taken automatically at the beginning and end of the group of dosimeters Stop Clicking on this command button will stop the read process after the current dosimeter s read cycle is completed Comment Clicking on this command button will bring up the Add Comment Dialog Box Figure 7 22 You may enter a comment of any length here for storage in the Comment Database keyed to the Group ID You may use the normal Windows edit functions be aware however that formatting information such as bold and underline will not be retained You may enter a c
63. 014206 0014207 0014208 0014213 10 16 1998 04 33 54 PM 10 16 1998 04 33 54 PM 0 19 1998 02 01 08 PM 0 10 19 1998 02 01 08 PM 10 19 1998 02 01 08 PM 10 19 1998 02 01 08 PM 10 19 1998 02 01 08 PM 0 al 014215 Reads Reads Since First Since Last TTP ECC ECC 0 ol Dosimeter Usage i iii Calibration Dosimeter 1 001 0 959 Calibration Dosimeter 0 942 1 129 Field Dosimeter 2 Field Dosimeter Field Dosimeter Field Dosimeter Field Dosimeter 014216 10 19 1998 02 01 08 PM 0 0 aI 0 0 Field Dosimeter 0 19 1996 02 01 08 PM ojojojojojo o 0 0 0014221 0 0 D Field Dosimeter 014222 0 19 1998 02 01 08 PM Field Dosimeter Figure 7 14 ECC Database Display Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 16 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 3 Search cont d 7 3 3 Log Database The Log Database contains all the error messages sent from the Reader Host computer to the WinREMS computer all error messages generated within WinREMS and all operator comments From the Main Menu select Search Log Database to bring the Search Log Database Dialog Box Figure 7 15 into view The fields in this dialog box operate as follow Date Time This field allows you to select a time period for the readings you wish to see There are three options as follows No Limits will place
64. 1 6 1 2 Dosimeter Configurations 00 6 1 6 1 3 Procedure Overview kaa aaa DAGANG pats cones bs 6 2 6 2 Dosimeter Cards y an ana 6 4 621 Prepare Dosimeters eiii ea dae ee ae 6 4 6 2 2 Generate Calibration Dosimeters 6 5 6 2 3 Calibrate Reader 4 25 05 5 che bie as 6 7 6 2 4 Calibrate Dosimeters NG a AN ete KAKA ANA a 6 9 6 3 Extremity DOSIMGIETS cad R AKON io 6 12 6 3 1 Prepare Dosimeters 0 0 vad esta eG Oe ede Naa 6 12 6 3 2 Generate Calibration Extremity Dosimeters 6 13 6 3 3 Calibrate Reader Kaawa vale ch eee se dees Uk 6 15 6 3 4 Calibrate Dosimeters oooooooooomom oo 6 17 6 4 Calibration Methodology 6 4 1 Element Correction Coefficients 6 20 6 4 2 Reader Calibration Factors 4 6 23 Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W O 0802 Page 0 5 Operator s Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS cont d Section Page 7 0 WinREMS Reference o oooooocoooooo o 7 1 Tal ENG 2 kaseh KG DALAGANG AS A d Oh Breed Be 7 1 TED Workspaces rate tad 7 1 Pl Import A A AS 7 2 Jabo EXPO a a A 7 4 7 1 4 Archive Restore Functions oooooo o 7 5 dala PENGUIN ada aaa DAA 7 5 KA PA RG AA 7 5 AA AA AP ide 7 5 E La AY ADAN 7 6 7 3 1 Response Database 2 0 ck etek aaa 7 6 Tae ECC Database AG II NANA pices 7 14 Eo Log Database aaa kaan pha bend 4 an eee ed ae 7 16 7 3 4 Electronics QC Databases a nala ah eee 7 18 TA VACW AA A
65. 1 Generate Calibration Dosimeters Model 8800 Automatic TLD Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 6 15 Operator s Manual 6 0 Calibration Procedures cont d 6 3 Extremity Dosimeters cont d 6 3 2 Generate Extremity Calibration Dosimeters cont d NOTE When performing Step 12 you must ensure that no workstations are reading dosimeters with ECCs applied The calibra tion process takes a few seconds and no workstations are able to access the ECC Database during that time If a reader attempts to access the ECC database while it is being updated it may time out and stop operations 12 Accept Results When you have completed the calculation process click on the Accept Button to accept the results on the screen and enter them on the database Any dosimeters falling outside the Acceptable ECC Range will not be highlighted and you should physically remove them from the Calibration Ringlet set The accepted Ringlets will be identified as Calibration Dosimeters on the ECC Database 13 Remove Cards Remove the Carrier Cards from the Reader and the Dosimeters from the Carrier Cards 6 3 3 Calibrate Reader This procedure establishes the Reader Calibration Factor RCF for a TTP using Extremity Dosimeters This may be done either for a newly defined TTP or as part of a regular QA practice 1 Prepare Dosimeters Prepare and expose a subset five to ten cards of the Extremity Dosimeters in accord with Section
66. 2 Mean Standard Deviation 347 1 2381 273 5 348 8 6582 4995 2083 4375 FT Extremity Irradiation TTP Title Production y fi Units Accept Close Help 200 200 200 200 ha ad Figure 7 29 Reader Calibration Dialog Box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 40 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 6 Calibration cont d 7 6 2 Reader Calibration cont d The fields in this dialog box operate as follows RCF Results The fields in this group box provide the results of the calibration Note that data will appear only in those columns where the TTP is active For EXT RAD Dosimeters only columns ii and iii are used Active These fields display the RCF prior to the current calibration procedure If the TTP was previously uncalibrated these values will be zero Pending This field displays the RCFs generated in the current calibration procedure after clicking on the Compute Button Percent Difference This field displays the percent differences between the Active and the Pending RCFs If this value exceeds 5 with no explanatory changes such as maintenance you may wish to investigate a possible cause for the change Reading Statistics The fields in this group box all relate to the readings generated in the current calibration procedure Total This field displays the total number of dosimeters highlighted
67. 35 Oc Tools Workspace Window He Figure 7 31 Electronics QC Menu 7 7 1 1 Start From the Main Menu select QC Electronics QC and Start to bring the Electronics QC Test Results Screen into view Figure 7 32 For procedural instructions including the Reader settings see Section 5 1 4 Electronics Qc Time fi 6 39 27 Instrument ID 6600 9312184 HB jaj co HB jaj o D 2 o D o 8 D o 8 a 8 a bo x o a o 12 z 5 3 x Ka a o 2 N N 15 o o s N N 5 Ss o 2 lalo aj j ojl o P Oo Ni N Seis m a S wl S N allo m j S S SKJALS ci Ql 2 m Sj S w S S co wo w o o o o o co pari o o EI o oj of s 8 N S AREI HE oj Sf a e di ejl o Figure 7 32 Electronics QC Test Results Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 46 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 7 QC cont d 7 7 1 Electronics QC cont d 7 7 1 1 Start cont d When the test begins the host computer runs a series of internal electronic tests on a pass fail basis It then takes a series of electronic measurements and computes the mean values and standard deviations for display It then takes Reference Light and PMT Noise readings the number of times specified by the operator and calculates the average and standard deviation for each set of readings WinREMS records these values i
68. 6 Transport Maintenance View Screen Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 8 6 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 8 0 8800 Host Reference cont d 8 1 View Screens cont d 8 1 3 Transport Maintenance cont d The Overcurrent Field shows the status of the motors that turn the Carrousels A yes indicates that one of the motors is in an overcurrent condition This means that the Carrousel is probably jammed or needs lubrication A no indicates that conditions are normal The Cartridge Full Field indicates whether the Cartridges directly over the rack are full of cards or are not full When the Load Cartridge is emptied during a read procedure the Load Carrousel should automatically rotate to the next position When the Unload Cartridge is filled the Unload Carrousel should automatically rotate to the next position The Cartridge Position Field indicates whether the Cartridges in the positions directly over the rack are in the raised up or lowered down position RACK The fields in this box define the status of the sliding rack that transports cards from one Carrousel to the other with the appropriate stops in between The Position Field indicates the position of the Rack s Card Pocket The possible responses in this field are the following Load Read Expose RL and Unload The Motor Control Active Field indicates the operational status of the servo co
69. 800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 6 0 Calibration Procedures cont d 6 2 Dosimeter Cards cont d 6 2 2 Generate Calibration Dosimeters cont d You may click on the Comment Button to add any comment you wish 7 Read Dosimeters Click on the Start button The Reader will begin to read the dosimeters 8 Close File and Exit When the Reader has completed reading all the dosimeters click on the Done Button to close the dialog box 9 Select Calibration Records From the Main Menu select Search Response Records to bring up the Search Response Database Dialog Box Figure 7 8 Enter the Group ID created in Step 6 and select the following entries in the designated fields Field Entry Dosimeter Type All Acquisition Mode All TL Response Any Element Display as Standard Report Standard Reports Computed Exposure Click on the OK Button This will bring all the records in the selected group into view Highlight all the records in the group NOTE The calibration of the entire system Readers and dosimeters is based on the mean response of the Calibration Cards requiring that all calibration cards in one workspace be calibrated together Therefore you may prefer to select all cards read with the Acquisition Mode set to Generate Calibration Dosimeters rather than select based on Group ID 10 Set Calibration Screen From the Main Menu select Calibration Generate cal Dosimeters to bring the Ge
70. 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 8 9 Operator s Manual 8 0 8800 Host Reference cont d 8 1 6 Print Functions am c ha The three selections grouped below the 10 Pinter View Screens control the print functions OS name Te do Properties 05 Status Ready 8 1 6 1 Print a The 8800 Host makes use of the standard baki Angga Windows print function To print a file click Pg pe om NG the Print Icon on the toolbar or pull down the pene fom wf ts View Menu and select Print This will bring ae i GHREIGH I Colate the Print Dialog Box Figure 8 9 into view l In this box you can select the print range and maa the number of copies to be printed Note that this command is only available on certain Figure 8 9 Print Dialog Box screens where a report can be printed 8 1 6 2 Print Setup The Print Setup Dialog Box Figure 8 10 can be accessed directly from the View pull OSEAAN NR cer a 04 Print Setup 121x down menu or by selecting Print from the z sd View pull down menu then Properties from Bi nn merna EE come the Print Dialog Box O Status Ready 05 Type Generic Text Only 14 Where FILE Print Setup offers a fixed list of printers Comment from which you can choose for printing Paper Orientation From here you can also choose the paper size Mea ae source and orientation Choose the Properties Source Automatically Select
71. 9556 RON 0 6262 ROI2 23 05 ADIS De 34Nye4adula 0 2450 RCF Cooling 58 06 mA 0 1093 ROM 1 131 ROI2 11 95 ROIS 71 25 ROI4 De 2angsadwa 0 0925 RCF Cooling Intensity nA De 2angaadwa L 27 m 124 C 852 y Channel Intensity nA De 2angsadwa ECC 11 n 1238 852 y Channel Figure 8 4 Glow Curve Screen Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 8 4 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 8 0 8800 Host Reference cont d 8 1 View Screens cont d 8 1 2 Expose Log Select View Expose Log to bring the Expose Log View to the screen Figure 8 5 This view lists all cards that have been exposed to the Internal Irradiator if installed Only the most recent run is displayed historical data is not retained You can scroll through the data using the arrows at the right of the screen The data is listed in columns as follows Date Time These columns show the date and time that the irradiation occurred Expose Log View View Control Expose Options Help Card Id This column shows the Card ID for each card that was irradiated Exposure Value This column shows the amount of Exposure received by the dosimeters The units for the exposure are established on the Expose Setup Screen Section 8 3 2 Setup Exposure Time This column displays the length of time the dosimeters were actually exposed to the source to generate the Exposure Value in the previ
72. A Ges oe ae CEA Oe ee EAS 8 4 8 1 3 Transport Maintenance 00 2000 ee 8 5 Sido AGUA ee ee ee ee EA 8 8 8 1 5 History Queue oxi ou tse Tan ee a eta ee ures ce 8 8 8 1 6 Print Functions aa ad phan arang bom Gn 8 9 a Pint PAR td 8 9 A A AA 8 9 A o yoe cetra ad ara anna ll eae ad 8 9 8 2 Control Functions e shin See obs as dd 8 10 8 2 1 Canto uses ari a daa 8 10 8 2 2 Date Time A A da 8 11 8 2 3 Password Maintenance oooooooooooo o o 8 12 8 24 Retransmit Results o eee 8 12 BA O AI 8 13 8 4 6 Update Software e wis is ainda dda as ha ee 8 13 8 3 Expose FUNCION essere esiaren paid geese ys 8 14 Bak initiate APA 8 14 832 SS AO PA 8 17 6 4 DUONG te oda as NA GANG BRN ake A E ERER 8 18 Bia ATIS 40 5 Sk Sade bd SSeS ORS Game ss LAOAG 8 18 8 4 2 Modes Arad Pee eis Anata O as 8 19 8 4 2 1 Auto Calibration ooooooooo o 8 20 GT AUG OCs Be kaa KG NLA GB a gE aS aes KA 8 22 84 23 Auto Blank vincent ga oe APANG ANIT KA ANN Sad 8 24 8 4 2 4 Running Auto Calibration Auto QC Auto Blank 8 26 80 Help Ment occ dese Kaha kA NA ka wd NUN 8 27 AS AAA MGA A E lao a BU kanga Bae 9 1 Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W O 0802 Page 0 7 Operator s Manual Appendices Appendix Page A Troubleshooting Documentation A 1 B ASCH Export Pile at ia A 3 C 31 5 Certain measuring devices A 25 Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader wi
73. Apply Figure 8 14 Time Zone Dialog Box The presence or absence of a checkmark Y in the Daylight Savings Time field determines whether the computer will or will not automatically adjust its internal clock for Daylight Savings Time Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 8 12 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 8 0 8800 Host Reference cont d 8 2 Control Functions cont d 8 2 3 Password Maintenance The 8800 Host has certain functions that are password protected Selecting any of these functions opens the Enter Password dialog box You must enter an acceptable Username and Password to proceed to the selected dialog box Passwords are administered form the Password Maintenance dialog box From this dialog box you can e Adda password to a user e Modify a user s password e Delete a user s password Note that the default Username is system and the default Password is system It is recommended that as part you your initial setup you generate at least one new username password combination with Administrator privileges then delete the system system combination This will prevent anyone who reads this manual from gaining access to your system The functions on the 8800 Host that are password protected are e Password Maintenance e Expose Setup e Mode Options Refer to section 7 9 2 Password Maintenance for additional information on administering passwords Retransmit Res
74. C requirements for the source Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W O 0802 Page 0 3 Operator s Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Page Nuclear Regulatory Commission License 0 12 Writing Conventions 2 a AA na Chee Cakes 0 13 Saf ty Warni igs e E acorn a ALAT 0 13 Safety Symbols 5 e A q et a 0 14 E ropean Notice sib taeda ah a etd ada 0 15 1 0 Introduction 1 1 General Description 4 3030 26 ade etets ARAL LAAN 1 1 1 2 Model 8800 Reader a csc patas aaa a as 1 2 1 3 8800 Hest Computens madaan bad NAA ALA seme NG 1 3 14 Wat MSs id TALA A Ha ka ac BAR pana 1 3 Led DA PAA 1 4 1 5 1 Whole Body and Environmental Dosimeters 1 4 1 5 2 EXT RAD Extremity Dosimeters 1 7 1 5 3 DXT RAD Extremity Dosimeters 1 9 1 6 Instrument Performance Specifications 1 10 1 7 Dosimetric Performance Specifications 1 10 2 0 Installation 2 1 Operating Requirements a 2 1 DEL SUES PA PP 2 1 IN A NOT Lak KON tae 2 1 2 2 Reader Semin oak dane GUS ete Kawa 2 2 223 PC Requirements 400034 ven Ae ae ha Pena pla andes 2 4 2 4 Software lata kyot hac BAE aa AG ON kaaa DA Es bale KA NAG Apa nala 2 4 3 0 General Instructions 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 1 Bil WnREM S os td SS Be Pa KG lee KAO DA 3 1 3 1 1 Mouse Support OS dike KATANA ADAN 3 1 3 1 2 Highlighting Records 44 30 oy deans GALA GANAN 3 1 JEI PassWord San wend ook eS Se Da NGABA aes Saas 3
75. Card Reference Light and PMT Noise readings and indicates that the reading was out of limits either to the high or low side Date Time These two columns identify when the reading was taken You may change the format of these two columns by using the Windows operating system Click on Start Settings Control Panel Regional Settings and then the Date and Time Tabs TTP This column identifies the number of the TTP used to take the readings Computed Exposure x Date Time TTP Reading Dosimeter ID Subject ID i ii iii 05 11 00 04 46 53 PM 1 RFD 406 iv Units 88 35 92 52 89 05 gU ECC 9898 4932 1 025 RCF 5739 2511 5660 05 11 00 04 48 05 PM 9046126 05 11 00 04 49 19 PM 9046474 Figure 7 11 Response Records Computed Exposure View Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 12 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 3 Search cont d 7 3 1 Response Database cont d 7 3 1 2 Computed Exposures cont d Reading type This column is a three character code defining Acquisitions Mode Dosimeter Function and Dosimeter Type according to Table 7 1 If you hover on any code in this column the code is spelled out Dosimeter ID This column displays the Dosimeter identification Subject ID This column displays the Employee ID if one was used i ii iii iv These columns display the actual reading for e
76. Charge Exposure p RCF 6 1 2 Dosimeter Configurations There also may be some variation in how you calibrate your system based on the type of dosimeters you have This sub section identifies some of these possibilities and offers suggestions for calibration based on the dosimeter types in your system Card Dosimeters Both Whole Body and Environmental Dosimeter Cards are identified in the database by their Card ID barcode One record is generated for each card The ECCs for each chip are identified by the Card ID and the chip position in the card The system can generate Field Cards Calibration Cards QC Cards and Blank Cards In some dosimetry systems there may be more than one type of Dosimeter Card being used e g Environmental and Personnel In such cases it is best to set up a separate workspace for each type This will create separate databases and generate Calibration Cards for each card type If setting up multiple workspaces is not feasible then the Personnel Card Type should be used for Calibration Cards When the Environmental Dosimeters are calibrated the ECCs generated will compensate for any differences in TL material Section 6 2 Dosimeter Cards describes all the calibration procedures for a card based dosimetry system Extremity Dosimeters Extremity Dosimeters are single element dosimeters with attached barcodes and are read in Carrier Cards Thermo Extremity Model 8800 Automated TLD Reader with Wi
77. Correction Coefficient ECC V Reader Calibration Factor ACF Employee ID Disabled C Not Required Required Export Format Text File y File Path c 4winrems results1 Format EE Exp Print m PMT Noise Intervalf10 Range _ mf a00 1 aco 1 fi 400 Reference Light 800 400 peo a 800 I aco 800 Interval 10 Range 4 400 OC Dosimeter Interval 30 Range 450 E 550 450 _ 550 1 1 a50 fso 1 450 650 7 Blank Dosimeter Interval 30 Range fo fio jo fio 1 jo fio 1 jo fio 7 Limits If reading exceeds 100000 halt instrument fi 000 Teread same dosimeter up to E times fi 0000 _ mark with warning flag Current Setup New Delete poe Cancel Help Figure 7 23 Acquisition Setup Dialog Box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 24 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 5 Read cont d 7 5 2 Acquisition Setup cont d eaten it Mode Apply Apply Apply EU jae EE Read Dosimeters Title You may enter any unique alphanumeric name up to sixteen characters to identify each Acquisition Setup Clicking on the arrow will open a listofexisting Acquisition Setups There is no limit to the number of setups you may create You cannot create a new setup by simply changing titles
78. D Reader with WinREMS Page 6 14 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 6 0 Calibration Procedures cont d 6 3 Extremity Dosimeters cont d 6 3 2 Generate Calibration Extremity Dosimeters cont d 6 Set Read Dosimeters Dialog Box From the WinREMS Main Menu select Read Start to bring up the Read Dosimeters Dialog Box Figure 7 21 Enter a unique Group ID Name In the TTP Field select the TTP Title that you established in Step 4 In the Acquisition Setup Field select the Acquisition Setup established in Step 5 You may click on the Comment Button to add any comment you wish 7 Read Dosimeters Click on the Start button The Reader will begin to read the dosimeters 8 Close File and Exit When the Reader has completed reading all the Dosimeters click on the Cancel Button to close the dialog box 9 Select Calibration Records From the Main Menu select Search Response Records to bring up the Search Response Database Dialog Box Figure 7 8 Enter the Group ID created in Step 6 and select the following entries in the designated fields Field Entry Dosimeter Type All Acquisition Mode All TL Response Any Element Display as Standard Report Standard Reports Computed Exposure Click on the OK Button This will bring all the records in the selected group into view Highlight all the records in the group NOTE The calibration of the entire system Readers and Dosimeters is base
79. E ID STATIOI HEATER ASSY Figure 1 2 Card Reader Block Diagram Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 1 3 Operator s Manual 1 0 Introduction cont d 1 2 Model 8800 Reader cont d 1 3 8800 Host Computer Operation of the Card Reader is controlled by a Pentium based host computer with a Windows NT operating system and an operator console consisting of a full keyboard and high resolution color monitor with menu driven software The architecture is a distributed processing system in which the host computer directs the operations of the Transport subsystem computer and each ofthe four Photronics subsystems establishes and maintains communication with WinREMS on the PC and supports the system s user interface Figure 1 2 While all card reading is under the control of WinREMS the operator can control the mechanical operation of the card Transport System through the host computer and the system interface This interface is used to rotate the carrousels to load and unload cards to irradiate cards if the optional Irradiator is installed and to set the internal clock calendar It also stores some communications history and a record of cards irradiated When the Reader is actually reading dosimeters the monitor displays glow curves as they are generated The technical architecture of the system includes both the Reader and a Windows based IBM compati
80. EMS PL 25415 664 or later WinREMS PL 26732 661 or later The following modifications were made 1 Corrected logic for determining the QC and Blank Interval Cards that are rejected because they were reread up to the reread times limit were not being applied to the interval counters Eliminated the redundancy of the card orientation logic The transport firmware performs card orientation checks and causes the reader to stop if a card is determined to be oriented incorrectly Software built with updated compiler Added carrousel motion control toolbar buttons Corrected anomalies associated with entering decimal point values on various dialogs Round exposure time and value fields to 2 decimal places Added implementation to respond to a send last response record message Files affected 1 8866Host exe Updated 2 trand11 d11 Updated Figure 8 29 Revision Log About Model 8800 Host Version 5 26469 004 Wed Dec 06 12 58 00 2000 Transport Version S 26285 000 040 Fri Mar 19 18 01 17 1999 Photronics A Version S 25071 002 Wed Oct 28 08 20 06 1992 Photronics B Version 25071 002 Wed Oct 28 08 20 06 1992 Photronics C Version 5 25071 002 Wed Oct 28 08 20 06 1992 Photronics D Version 5 25071 002 Wed Oct 28 08 20 06 1992 Figure 8 30 About Model 8800 Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 8 28 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual BLANK PAGE Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Operator
81. EXT RAD or Ringlets DXT RAD 6 3 1 Prepare Dosimeters This section defines a recommended procedure for irradiating Extremity Dosimeters to be used for any calibration procedure Before beginning any calibration procedures you should establish a fixed fade time for your operations for each of the calibration procedures and record them in the space provided below It is important that the time between irradiation and readout for all dosimeters be consistent in order to keep fading the same from one calibration to the next The specific length of this time is not as important as is its consistency We recommend that the fade time be no less than thirty minutes Otherwise any length of time that suits your operations is acceptable but it must be consistent from one time to the next If the dosimeters are not irradiated simultaneously they should be read in the sequence in which they were irradiated Generate Calibration Dosimeters fade time Reader Calibration Dosimeters fade time Dosimeter Calibration fade time NOTE When irradiating Dosimeters for any calibration purpose they must be irradiated in only one position in the Carrier Card and that position must be used consistently at all times Record that position below Extremity Calibration Irradiation Position The following procedure will guide you through the process of preparing dosimeters to be read for calibration 1 Anneal Dosimeters Reader anneal th
82. Intensity nA De Sn paaadwa L 100 Channel 560 9 gU 17 40 RON Intensity nA 0 5009 RCF 76 na De 2angaadwa 100 Channel Status Figure 3 1 Intensity nA De 2anggaadwa Intensity nA Da 2anggaadwa L Channel Results Screen Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 3 4 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 3 0 General Instructions cont d 3 3 Reader Controls For all non dosimetric purposes the operator controls the mechanical operation of the card Transport System through the 8800 Host Computer This software resides on the Host Computer built into the Model 8800 Reader The keyboard and display for this computer are mounted on top of the Reader It is used for loading and unloading dosimeters from the Reader irradiating cards monitoring TL data as it is generated and for maintenance CAUTION Do not set beverages or any other liquids on top of the instrument Any spillage has the potential for damage to electronic circuitry The 8800 Host is based on Windows NT Ver 4 0 and operates in the same manner as a Windows NT PC It is not however available for other user applications The Main Menu appears on the second bar at the top of the screen Figure 8 1 Each Main Menu item leads to a submenu of related operations There are four kinds of data that can be viewed on the 8800 Host monitor Glow Curve Expose Log Transport Maintenance and His
83. Manual 9 0 Index cont d Subject Section Unit Scaling esi cits es ais 3 1 6 WinREMS Exiting from 3 1 5 General Instructions 3 0 NG a IN O E EN E S 2 4 Startup is gna ha dase 3 1 4 Workspaces Reference nieren a n 7 1 1 Workstation General Description 1 1 Writing Conventions Page 0 4 Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 9 4 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual BLANK PAGE Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page A 1 Operator s Manual Appendix A TROUBLESHOOTING DOCUMENTATION The purpose of this form is to aid you and your Thermo Electron Corp RM amp P Technical Service Representative in troubleshooting problems with your software Complete the top portion of this form upon receipt ofthis manual When you have a software problem copy this page and enter the required information on the copy before calling Thermo Electron Corp RM amp P You may be asked to fax this form to us Instrument Model Serial Number Manual Number 8800 W O 0802 008 WinREMS Version No In WinREMS click on Help About System Properties In Windows click on Start Settings Control Panel System Operating System Version _____ Operating System Types check one LI Windows NT LI Windows 98 Service Pack U Windows 95 LI Windows 98 2 Edition Computer Make 1 Windows 95 OSR2 1 Windows 2000 RAM Memory KB Hard Disk Size GB Processor Type Processor Sp
84. NLOAD CARROUSEL REVERSE LOAD CARROUSEL m CARD TRANSPORT COMMANDS m UNLOAD CARROUSEL LOAD pr RACK a 3 Home Position 7 Position READ SEND RACK TO UNLOAD POSITION INO Overcurrent NO SEND RACK TO EXPOSE POSITION a SEND RACK TO REF LIGHT POSITION INO Cartridge Full NO Motor Control Active YES SEND RACK TO READ POSITION TE ry A SEND RACK TO LOAD POSITION UP Cartridge Position UP NORMALIZE RACK Detected NO The right section of the screen contains seven boxed areas each of which reports the status of a logical grouping of sensors The remainder of this section explains the meaning and operation of these fields UNLOAD CARROUSEL LOAD These two boxes each have four fields to indicate the status of the Load and Unload Cartridges The number in the Home Position Field indicates which one of the eight Cartridge positions on each Carrousel is presently located immediately behind the access doors and can be used to insert and remove cartridges REVERSE UNLOAD CARROUSEL Oriented NO LOAD CARTRIDGE UP LOAD CARTRIDGE DOWN UNLOAD CARTRIDGE UP UNLOAD CARTRIDGE DOWN r BAR CODES OPEN ALL GAS VALVES OPEN GAS VALVE A Cardld OPEN GAS VALVE B OPEN GAS VALVE C Elementi DPEN GAS VALVE D CLOSE ALL GAS VALVES Element ii Element iii Element iv m IRRADIATOR C UPS Shutter CLOSED i Active NO m GAS Supply ON ValveA OFF ValveB OFF Valve OFF ValveD OFF Figure 8
85. OPEAN NOTICE Model 8800 Products with the CE Marking comply with the EMC directive 89 336 EEC issued by the Commission of the European Community Compliance with the directive implies conformity to the following European Standards EN 55011 1991 Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of industrial scientific and medical ISM radio frequency equipment Emission standard EN50082 1 1994 Electromagnetic compatibility Generic immunity standard IEC 61000 4 2 1995 IEC 801 3 1984 IEC 61000 4 3 1997 IEC 61000 4 4 1995 IEC 61000 4 5 1995 IEC 61000 4 6 1996 IEC 61000 4 8 1993 IEC 61000 4 11 1994 EN 61010 1 1990 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use Note In order for the instrument to comply with the standards as tested the following must be adhered to The front panel Access Doors should not be opened while in Read or Expose Modes The following maximum cable lengths must be observed AC Power 3 0 meters 10 ft UPS Input 3 0 meters 10 ft Serial 7 5 meters 25 ft Parallel 3 0 meters 10 ft Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 0 16 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual BLANK PAGE Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 1 1 Operator s Manual 1 0 Introduction 1 1 General Description The TLD System 8800 Workstation is a fully automated state of the
86. Option Dialog Box must be set to Enable This entire sequence proceeds without further operator intervention The operator then proceeds with the calibration computations in the normal manner NOTE You must ensure that the Exposure Value entered in the Irradiation Field on the WinREMS Calibration Screens Figure 7 29 or 7 30 is the same as the Exposure Value on the Mode Options Dialog Box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 8 27 Operator s Manual 8 0 8800 Host Reference cont d 8 5 Help Menu Clicking Help displays the Help submenu Figure 8 28 There are three options available 8 5 1 Help Topics Click the Help Topics option to access the Online Help system 8 5 2 Revision Log Click this option to open the Windows Notepad Viewer with a file named README TXT Figure 8 29 This file explains the features that have been changed in successive versions of the 8800 Host 8 7 3 About Model 8800 Click the About Model 8800 option to open the About Model 8800 dialog box Figure 8 30 This dialog box identifies the firmware version for the 8800 Host the Transport Computer and the Photronics Help Help Topics Revision Log About Model 8800 Figure 8 28 Help Menu El Readme txt Notepad File Edit Search Help 8809 Host PL 26394 004 The following software versions are required Transport S 26285 666 646 or later TLDREMS PL 23688 621 or later NETR
87. PA 7 20 7 4 1 a A sain qe Suen n Sgn 7 20 14 27 Regions of Interest naagapan tien keen i 7 20 7 4 3 Computed Exposures aaa Nina 7 20 7 4 4 First Previous Next Last Record 7 20 TAS LOOM Bales fra ae 7 20 14 61 Status Baltic ta Beda eke ALANO we 7 20 Doe O HA PA 7 21 Tol SPL PA AP ee A Rs 7 21 7 5 2 Acquisition Setup rn aoa ed at 7 23 dos WET Setup AAA Oh ease AE EM mal ee By Gal 7 29 ASA Retransmit oi ayo ea eae oda yc EBA TAN 7 35 T 6 Calibration HAB yd r nin Meg eae aa LA 7 36 7 6 1 Generate Calibration Dosimeters 7 36 7 6 2 Reader Calibration dai 40 sd Ska ee Sao Bo 7 39 7 6 3 Dosimeter Calibration o 7 42 7 7 QC AAN a 3 paman a le mkaka aha ba 7 45 TS ka CAR Mk pra nad Sigh SMe cial aie AN 7 48 O WOLKSDACE Ss ghee aoe e og nen ates ded 7 53 Til Properties ds AK PAA 7 53 7 9 2 Password Maintenance 0000055 7 57 LALO WAG a deb hee kda Pere alt clay NAA aaa ln 7 59 TALCA Gaan KA St FERS PENAY oe eRe o AG 7 60 ddl Help Opies maa Nd Na eae slog Babee 7 60 7 11 2 Version Information alii la oS oe 7 61 TALI About ee sra anost Re A ear Be ee i 7 61 Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 0 6 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS cont d Section Page 8 0 8800 Host Reference o ooooooooooo o 8 1 Kali View Screens sat Saad bt at are Sale hea 8 2 8 1 1 Glow CUNG DI AA 8 2 Saiz Expose LOS hatte N
88. Quality Control Chart plots Compare trends in the Reference Light level against trends in the Reader Calibration Factor Determine whether the values of other parameters may suggest a cause if either the RCF or the Reference Light readings change by more than 10 without a corresponding change in the other PMT Noise is the reading of the noise generated by the photomultiplier tube it should be as low as possible but will never be zero in normal operation When you first receive your Reader you should run the Electronics QC routine several time s to establish the normal range of values As a general rule you should initially set the valu the observed mean e for one standard deviation at 10 of As additional data is added to the Daily Quality Control Charts you may revise these limits Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 5 6 Operator s Manual 5 0 Quality Assurance cont d 5 1 Daily QA cont d 5 1 4 Electronics QC cont d 5 1 4 3 Resetting Parameters To reset the parameters for the readings that appear in the lower portion of the Electronics QC Screen proceed as follows 1 Access Re set Parameters Screen From the Main Menu select QC Electronics QC and Setup to bring the Electronics QC Setup Dialog Box into view On this screen you may change the Min and Max criteria for any of the electronics measurements and the Number of Samples Fields which c
89. S 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 9 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 3 Search cont d 7 3 1 Response Database cont d 7 3 1 1 Glow Curves This view displays the full glow curve and heat curve and certain summary dosimetric information about the curve This center portion of this view displays the full glow curve in solid blue with a red line to indicate the temperature of each point If Regions of Interest have been defined they are identified by vertical lines At the top of the screen at the extreme left is a small checkbox labeled Selected If this box is checked the record has been selected higlighted on either the Regions of Interest or Computed Exposure view If this box is not checked you may check it and the record will be selected and highlighted on the other two views Above the glow curve area is a line of information about the dosimeter record This line provides the following information Date and time of the reading TTP Number E Glow Curves 1 O Selected Intensity nA 100 150 Channel Intensity nA 100 150 Channel TO SET ROls Double click a chart ROM Green None R012 Orange SHIFT ROI3 Hot Pink CTRL 10 19 98 14 20 33 Da SAmgaadwa Ja aanggsadwa R014 Yellow ALT 0014207 test18814 Acquisition Mode Dosimeter ID and Group ID In a box to the left of each curve the dosimetric information is displayed The first value is the t
90. S Page 7 14 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 3 Search cont d 7 3 2 ECC Database The ECC Element Correction Coefficient Database contains calibration records for each dosimeter that has been calibrated If a dosimeter was processed through the calibration procedure but was out of range it is recorded in the ECC Database as having a bad ECC From the Main Menu select Search ECC Database to bring up the Search ECC Database Dialog Box Figure 7 13 From this dialog box you can select ECC records based on the Date and Time and or the Dosimeter ID The fields in this box operate as follows Date Time This field allows you to select a time period for the readings you wish to see There are three options as follows No Limits will place no restrictions on the date and time the dosimeters were read After will select all readings from the date you enter up to the present time Range allows you to set start and end dates for the readings you wish to see Dosimeter ID This field allows you to base your selection on Dosimeter IDs There are three options No Limits will place no restrictions on the Dosimeter ID Search ECC Database x Date Time C No Limits After Range 12 31 00 12 00 00 PM 12 31 201 12 00 00 PM Dosimeter ID C NoLimits Single Value Range 7 1 44 coma te Figure 7 13 Search ECC Database Dialog Box Si
91. S Page 8 26 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 8 0 8800 Host Reference cont d 8 4 Options cont d 8 4 2 Modes cont d 8 4 2 4 Steps for Running Auto Calibration Auto QC and Auto Blank This section applies to all three of the Mode Options When the term Mode Option Dialog Box is used it refers to either the Auto Calibration dialog box the Auto QC dialog box or the Auto Blank dialog box 1 The Acquisition Mode field on the WinREMS Acquisition Setup Dialog Box Figure 7 23 must be set to one of the Acquisition Modes 2 The Enable Mode radio button on the Mode Option Dialog Box must be selected 3 The selected Acquisition Mode on the Mode Option Dialog Box must match the Acquisition Mode field on the WinREMS Acquisition Setup dialog box Figure 7 23 4 The Acquisition Setup field on the WinREMS Read Dosimeters dialog box Figure 7 21 must name the Acquisition Setup Figure 7 23 that you want to run Since you can create and save as many Acquisition Setups as you want you must be sure that the Setup named on the Read Dosimeters dialog box is indeed the setup you want to run 5 Click the Start button on the WinREMS Read Dosimeters dialog box Figure 7 21 to begin the read process The dosimeters from the Mode Option dialog box that you selected in Step 2 will be annealed exposed and read Note that for the dosimeters to be annealed the Pre Anneal option on the Mode
92. String 16 16s Wilcox Lew the TL Badge Date TTP last edited TTP File Long decimal integer ld 930318 See Table 4 See Table 4 Mar 18 1993 Number of TTP used in reading TTP Setup Dialog Box Signed decimal integer Time TTP last edited TTP File Long decimal integer ld 235845 See Table 5 See Table 5 11 58 45 04 PM 3 The following flags are available a bit set in a long word will indicate the flag is true 0x00000001 element enabled 0x00000010 reread limit exceeded 0x00000020 halt limit exceeded 0x00000040 mark limit exceeded 0x00000080 reading out of range 0x00000100 quality factor applied 0x00000200 background factor applied 0x00000400 rcf applied 0x00000800 ecc applied 0x00001000 high gain set 0x00002000 low gain set 0x00010000 reread times exceeded Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W O 0802 Page A 21 Appendix B ASCII Export File 4 0 Response Database Specification cont d Table 7 Response Database Element specific Section Data Fields re Default ELEMENT ID Element Identification Number Attribute 3 String 16 16s _ 127594 a ANNEAL_TEMP Anneal Temperature Signed decimal integer d ANNEAL_TIME Anneal Time TTP Signed decimal integer d 5 ACQ_TIME Acquisition Time TTP Signed decimal integer d 20 BACKGROUND_VALUE Calculated Background TTP Floating point decimal Yof 0 01 Radiation BIN SIZE Bin Size 60 x Acquisition Time Signed decimal inte
93. TLD Reader with WinREMS Page 6 10 6 0 Calibration Procedures cont d 9 6 2 Dosimeter Cards cont d 6 2 4 Calibrate Dosimeters cont d 6 Set Acquisition Parameters From the WinREMS Main Menu select 10 Read Acquisition Setup to bring the Acquisition Setup Dialog Box into view Figure 7 23 Set the parameters in this box to the conditions in Table 6 4 7 Set Read Dosimeter Dialog Box From the WinREMS Main Menu select Read Start to bring up the Read Dosimeters Dialog Box Figure 7 21 Enter a unique Group ID Name In the TTP Field select the TTP Title that you established in Step 5 In the Acquisition Setup Field select the Acquisition Setup that you established in Step 6 You may click on the Comment Button to add any comment you wish 8 Read Dosimeters Click on the Start button The Reader will begin to read the cards Table 6 4 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual Close File and Exit When the Reader has completed all the reading all the cards click on the Cancel Button to close the dialog box Select Calibration Records From the Main Menu select Search Response Records to bring up the Search Response Database Dialog box Figure 7 8 Enter the Group ID created in Step 6 and select the following entries in the designated fields Field Entry Dosimeter Type All Acquisition Mode All TL Response Any Element Display as Standard Report Standard Reports Computed Exposure C
94. TP parameters The TTP is the time based profile of the temperature to which the gas impinging on the dosimeter is heated during a read cycle The TTP has three segments Preheat Acquire and Anneal Preheat is used to TEMPERATURE Is RAMP RATE MAX_TEMP _ p RAMP RATE PREHEAT TEMP 100 C S e PREHEAT ACQUISITION ANNEAL AMBIENT AMBIENT eliminate the more rapidly fading low temperature peaks of the glow curve to ensure more consistent readings Acquire is the portion of the cycle during which the PMT is actively reading the light emitted from the TLDs collecting the 200 data points and generating the glow curve Anneal is used to extend the time of heating without acquiring data to ensure that all the TL signal is removed from the material A graph of a typical TTP is shown in Figure 7 24 When any field is changed the Date Edited for the TTP set being displayed becomes the Current Date and if the change would affect the calibration the four Calibration Factors the Average PMT Noise and the Average Reference Light Fields revert to none subject to the action of the Cancel and OK Buttons The fields and buttons on this dialog box operate as follows TIME SECONDS Figure 7 24 Typical Time Temperature Profile Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 30 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 5 Read cont d 7 5 3 TTP Setup
95. The WinREMS export function uses Export Configuration file TLDEXPT CFG 3500 5500 or EXPORTASCII CFG 4500 6600 8800 to specify the format of the ASCII Export File You must modify this file to customize the Export File as shown below Note that in this example we will use TLDEXPT CFG as the file name If you are using a model 4500 6600 or 8800 Reader replace this file name with EXPORTASCILCFG 1 Using any Windows text editor such as Notepad select TLDEXPT CFG 2 Resave this file under a different name such as tldexpt old If you want to use it again it will be available 3 Initially do not modify or delete any of the existing lines in the old configuration file They will be a reminder of the proper syntax to be used in format specifications as described in Section 2 2 Ouptut Format Specification 4 Use Tables 6 and 7 to select variables for the new Export File 5 Starting above the top line of the old listing type the field label for the first leftmost variable of the new Exported ASCII File Or move an existing line to that position 6 On the second line type the label of the next variable to be included in the Export File to appear to the right of the first 7 Continue this until all of the desired labels have been added to TLDEXPT CFG Keep in mind that each record may take up more than one full line on either the monitor screen or printer depending on the number of variables used and their
96. You must use either the New or the Copy button to create a new setup Acquisition Mode This field defines the purposes for which the dosimeter may be read The available options are Read Dosimeters Calibrate Reader Calibrate Dosimeters Generate Calibration Dosimeters Anneal Dosimeters This selection does not affect the Read operation but it does limit the subsequent use of the data to the purpose for which it was read For example readings taken in the Anneal Dosimeters Mode cannot be used to calibrate the Reader NOTE Certain Acquisition Modes require specific calibration settings ECC and RCF You must set these correctly for the calibration procedures to operate correctly See Table 7 3 for these requirements Calibrate Reader Calibrate Dosimeters Gen Cal Dosimeters no no Anneal Dosimeters Table 7 2 Calibration Factors by Read Mode The characteristics of each Acquisition Mode are listed below Read Dosimeters is used to read Field Dosimeters There are no limitations on applying ECC and RCF Calibration dosimeters are rejected Calibrate Dosimeters is used to generate ECCs for all types of dosimeters The RCF should be on in the Apply Calibration group box If the designated TTP is not calibrated all dosimeters will be rejected Generate Calibration Dosimeters will read all types of dosimeters Neither the RCF nor the ECC should be applie
97. a complete Harshaw Health Physics Record System HPRS Other WinREMS based Readers which may be on the same network include the medium capacity Model 6600 Automated TLD Card Reader and the Model 4500 Manual Reader The Model 3500 Manual TLD Chip Reader and the Model 5500 Automatic TLD Chip Reader may also be operated with WinREMS Figure 1 1 Typical Model 8800 Workstation Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 1 2 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 1 0 Introduction cont d 1 2 Model 8800 Reader The mechanical portion of the Reader consists of two carrousels one for unread cards and one for cards that have been read a barcode reader a TLD read station an optional Sr irradiator and a transport mechanism Cards that have been placed in the cartridges are moved between the two carrousels The carrousels have spaces for eight cartridges each of which can hold up to 200 cards As the transport mechanism moves a card to the read station 1t passes the barcode ID reader It is in this area that the difference between the standard and the EXT RAD versions is most evident The base model has a single barcode reader to read the Card ID of a standard TLD Card Figure 1 2 The EXT RAD version has three barcode readers positioned to read the Carrier Card ID and both of the Chipstrate IDs In the Read Station the TLD chips are heated causing them to give off light in proportion to their radiation exposure T
98. able Enable m Exposure Mode Value Value 100 gu Time 120 09 seconds Figure 8 27 Auto Blank Dialog Box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 8 25 Operator s Manual 8 0 8800 Host Reference cont d 8 4 Options cont d 8 4 2 Modes cont d 8 4 2 3 Auto Blank cont d In the Auto Blank dialog box all the Acquisition Modes that you expect to use can be selected and left on Any Acquisition Mode that is not selected is considered disabled If none of these Acquisition Modes are selected then the Blank Dosimeters are read only once in the mode displayed in the Acquisition Mode field on the Acquisition Setup dialog box Figure 7 23 Pre Anneal Reading These two radio buttons determine whether the Blank Dosimeters will first be annealed When this option is Enable each Blank Dosimeter is annealed to remove any residual signal before it is exposed and read If this option is Disable the Blank Dosimeters are not annealed before being exposed and read Exposure These three fields are used to set the amount of exposure that the Blank Dosimeters receive Note The Exposure parameters on the Auto Blank dialog box are independent of any parameters set in the Expose Initiate dialog box Figure 8 18 The setup parameters on the Expose Setup dialog box Figure 8 20 are used for exposures initiated by both the Expose Initiate di
99. ach element in the units shown in the Units Column For EXT RAD only columns ii and 111 will be used Read Calibrate Dosimeter Usage Field Second Letter one Blank N PMT Noise P REF Light L NOTES Dosimeter Design third letter dosimeters being read Dosimeter Reader units This column identifies the units for the readings in the i to iv columns If the TTP was not calibrated or if RCF was not applied the units will be nanocoulombs nC If the TTP was calibrated and the RCF applied the units will be the calibration units of that TTP On this view or the Regions of Interest View you may highlight a subset of the records for further processing such as printing or for calibration purposes Highlighting records is done in the same way as most Windows programs by clicking on the record you wish to highlight In these screens however the mouse pointer must be in the extreme left gray column To highlight one record move the pointer to the desired line in the gray column and click the left mouse button To highlight a number of contiguous records click on the first record and lt Shift gt click on the last of the desired records To highlight multiple non contiguous records lt Ctl gt click on each of the desired records Records highlighted on either of these views will appear with a check in the Selected Box Calibrate Generate Calibration Dosimeter Pa F RF amaron c FEE Quality Con
100. ader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 1 7 Operator s Manual 1 0 Introduction cont d 1 5 Dosimeters cont d 1 5 1 Whole Body and Environmental Dosimeters cont d The lead and tantalum filters that shield the CaF flatten the energy response and enable the dosimeter to meet the requirements of ANSI N549 1975 For periods in excess of one month the LiF response is recommended The maxi mum over response of LiF is approximately 40 therefore it does not need a flattening filter to meet the ANSI Standard The filtered CaF material may significantly underestimate the environmental dose at the 40 keV cutoff of the flattening filter In this case the unfiltered LiF although it is less sensitive will provide better dose measurements due to its nearly tissue equivalent energy response 1 5 2 EXT RAD Extremity Dosimeters The Harshaw EXT RAD Extremity Dosimeters consist of a Polyamide Kapton strip with a TL chip and a five digit barcode ID bonded to it This complete assembly is known as a Chipstrate Figure 1 8 This Chipstrate is inserted in a sealed disposable pouch which is then attached to any of a variety of finger rings caps or straps that can be worn on a body extremity After the completion of the exposure period the pouch is cut away and the Chipstrate is removed for reading VINYL POUCH 7 mg cm gt TLD 700 CHIPSTRATE TIRE Figure 1 8 Chipstrate Chipstrates are read by first ins
101. ads Since Last ECC This column shows the number of times each dosimeter has been read for any purpose since the last time it was calibrated TTP This column identifies the number of the TTP used to take the readings Dosimeter Usage This column identifies the purpose for the dosimeter will be used This is defined in the calibration process i ii Gii iv These columns display the ECC values for each dosimeter You may highlight a subset of the records for further processing such as printing or exporting Highlighting records is done in the same way as most Windows programs by clicking on the record you wish to highlight In this screen however the mouse pointer must be in the extreme left gray column To highlight one record click on the desired line in the gray column To highlight a number of contiguous records click on the first record and lt Shift gt click on the last of the desired records To highlight multiple non contiguous records lt Ctl gt click on each of the desired records You may highlight all records by clicking in the gray box immediately to the left of the Dosimeter ID column heading You may print or export all the selected records or a highlighted subset of the records by following the instructions in the corresponding subsection of the File Menu Section 7 1 File E Element Correction Coefficient 1 BEE Element Conection Coefficient pomer Date Time 0014199 0014200 0
102. affects the Shallow and Lens Of The Eye Dose Calibration Factors used in the dose computation The options are T1204 T1204 amp Sr90 Y090 Win8840 Algorithm Setup Holder 8840 Sr90 Y90 DU TI 204 amp Sr Y90 amp DU and User Defined Default values are built in the listed sources and combinations If you select User Defined the Dose Calibration Factor Kb field appears In this field you must then enter the relative response of the dosimeter to a pure beta field The units will be the same as the selection in the Units field The procedure for determining this value is given in the algorithm User s Manual Neutron The model source for the Neutron Field is entered here The options are None and User Defined There are no default values built into the system If you select User Defined the Dose Calibration Factor Kn field appears In this field you must then enter the relative response of the dosimeter to a pure neutron field The units will be the same as the selection in the Units field The procedure for determining this value is given in the algorithm User s Manual Edited by sstem Dateedited 3 25 02 8 41 21 2 Name PhTI Mi Comments 71204 or T1204 and photon mixtures Photons General Mi Beta User Defined y Neutron User Defined nG Dose Calibration Factor Kb 1 00 gurem Dose Calibration Factor Kn 0 00 gurem iii iv Units i Cs 137
103. al Signed decimal integer d 3500 3500 4500 5500 6600 8800 Number of TLD Chips read per TTP Setup Signed decimal integer dosimeter Always 1 for 3500 and 5500 Date RCF last created TTP File Long decimal integer ld 930318 See Table 4 Mar 18 1993 Time RCF last created TTP File Long decimal integer ld 235845 See Table 5 11 58 45 04 PM Date of Reading Long decimal integer ld 930318 See Table 4 Mar 18 1993 Time of Reading Reader Long decimal integer ld 235845 See Table 5 11 58 45 04 PM Purpose of Reading Acquisition Setup Dialog Signed decimal integer d 0 Unknown Box s abe 1 Read Field Cards Reader 2 Calibrate Reader 3 Calibrate Cards 4 Generate Calibration Cards 5 Anneal Cards 6 Read Extremity Dosimeters 7 Calibrate Extremity Dosimeters 8 Anneal Extremity Dosimeters 9 Generate Calibration Extremity Dosim s 10 Calibrate Extremity Reader 8800 W 0 0802 Data Field Label RECORD TYPE RESPONSE UNIT SUBJECT ID TTP DATE TTP NUMBER TTP TIME Notes Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page A 20 Appendix B ASCII Export File Default Format Description Variable Type Optional Format Type of Record Signed decimal integer 132 128 Response Record Patient Record 129 TTP Record 130 RCF Record 131 ECC Record 132 Patient Record Response Unit TTP Setup Dialog Box Signed decimal integer Identification of person wearing Chipset Settings Patient ID
104. alibration Factor RCF If the high voltage setting is changed or if a TTP is changed you may have to generate a new RCF for all your calibrated TTPs Otherwise we recommend that you check the Reader Calibration Factor for one commonly used TTP on a daily basis and record the RCF on a Daily Control Chart If the new RCF varies from the previous one by more than 2 you should find out why Use the troubleshooting techniques in the Technical Reference Manual Publication No 8800 P S See Section 6 2 3 Calibrate Reader in this manual for instructions on performing the calibration Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 5 3 Operator s Manual 5 0 Quality Assurance cont d 5 1 Daily QA cont d 5 1 4 Electronics QC Electronic Quality Control checks confirm that the instrument s electronics are operating within their design specifications These procedures require the use of an external PC and WinREMS If you are in full operation 24 hours a day allow the Reader to sit without taking readings for 15 minutes before starting Electronics QC 5 1 4 1 Test Procedure To check the Electronics QC Test values proceed as follows 1 Select Functions On the 8800 Host Screen select View Glow Curves to allow the WinREMS PC to control the Reader 2 Access Electronics QC Screen On the WinREMS PC from the Main Menu select QC Electronics QC and Start to bring the Electronics QC Test Resu
105. alog box Figure 8 18 and the Auto Blank dialog box Figures 8 25 Mode Mode determines whether an entry is entered in the Time field or in the Value field when defining the exposure the Blank Dosimeters receive When one of these two options Value or Time is selected the selected field becomes highlighted indicating that it is now a data entry field and that an entry value is expected The field that is not selected Value or Time is grayed out This field then becomes a display field and is calculated automatically based on the calibration values and the decay rate In other words e If Value is selected in the Mode field an entry must be made in the Value field and no entry can be made in the Time field e If Time is selected in the Mode field an entry must be made in the Time field and no entry can be made in the Value field Value This field defines the amount of radiation to which the Blank Dosimeters are exposed When you set the Exposure Mode to Value this is a data entry field Otherwise it is a display field The units of exposure as set in the Expose Setup dialog box Figure 8 20 are displayed to the right of this field Time This field defines the length of time for which the Blank Dosimeters are exposed When you set the Exposure Mode to Time this is a data entry field Otherwise it is a display field Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREM
106. alog box Figure 8 20 are used for exposures initiated by both the Expose Initiate Dialog Box Figure 8 18 and the Auto Calibration dialog box Figure 8 25 Mode Mode determines whether an entry is entered in the Time field or in the Value field when defining the exposure the Calibration Dosimeters receive When one of these two options Value or Time is selected the selected field becomes highlighted indicating that it is now a data entry field and that an entry value is expected The field that is not selected Value or Time is grayed out This field then becomes a display field and is calculated automatically based on the calibration values and the decay rate In other words e If Value is selected in the Mode field an entry must be made in the Value field and no entry can be made in the Time field e If Time is selected in the Mode field an entry must be made in the Time field and no entry can be made in the Value field Value This field defines the amount of radiation to which the Calibration Dosimeters are exposed When you set the Exposure Mode to Value this is a data entry field Otherwise it is a display field The units of exposure as set in the Expose Setup dialog box Figure8 20 are displayed to the right of this field Time This field defines the length of time for which the dosimeters are exposed When you set the Exposure Mode to Time this is a data entry
107. aluminized Mylar filtration determines the shallow dose The total filtration for this element combining the PTFE card encap sulation and the aluminized Mylar filter is 17 mg cm A TLD 600 chip 0 38 mm thick with 300 mg cm ABS plastic filtration measures lens of the eye and neutron dose 030 ABS Environmental TL Card The environmental ABS plastic 0 010 inches of tantalum and 0 002 inches of lead The LiF Mg Ti are shielded by only the 80 mg cm ABS The use of two elements of each type improves the statistics of the measurement The CaF material has higher sensitivity than the LiF elements by a factor of 30 but also exhibits a higher fading rate This extremely high sensitivity makes it a superior TL material for short term no more than one month environmental monitoring however the higher fading rate does limit its usefulness for long duration environmental measurements Various preheat techniques can reduce this fading For example 160 C for 10 seconds preheat reduces the fading to less than 3 for 100 hours after exposure when stored in the dark at 20 C TLD 100 035 card is composed of two CaF Dy TLD 200 elements and two LiF Mg Ti TLD 100 elements all of which are 0 035 inches thick Figure 1 7 The CaF Dy elements are shielded by 80 mg cm TLD 200 035 CaF2 D 030 ABS 010 Ta 002 Pb Figure 1 7 Type 8807 Environmental Dosimeter Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Re
108. amic Range Seven decades Reference Light stability short term Less than 0 5 variation based on 1 standard deviation of 10 consecutive readings TTP reproducibility El E High Voltage stability short term 0 005 Linearity Less than 1 deviation Dark Current background noise Less than 1 uGy Cs equivalent dark current Stability better than 1 0 uGy based on 1 standard deviation of 10 consecutive measurements Warm up time 20 minutes Throughput with standard heating profile TLD Cards 140 per hour Chipstrates 280 per hour TTP capabilities Preheat temperature 20 to 300 C Preheat time 0 to 218 sec Acquisition time 10 to 300 sec Temperature rate 1 to 30 C sec Acquisition temperature to 400 C Post read anneal temperature to 400 C 1 7 Dosimetric Performance Specifications The following performance characteristics have been experimentally determined using Harshaw LiF Mg Ti chips mounted in standard aluminum substrates Radiation types and energies Photon Greater than 1 keV Neutron Thermal to 100 MeV Beta Greater than 70 MeV Linear gt 1 Measurement range LiF Mg Ti 100 uGy 10 mrad to 1 Gy 100 rad LiF Mg Cu P 10 uGy 1 mrad to 10 Gy 1000 rad Supralinear Measurement range LiF Mg Ti 1 Gy 100 rad to 20 Gy 2 000 rad LiF Mg Cu P 10 Gy 1000 rad to 20 Gy 2 000 rad Tissue equivalence Nearly tissue equivalent Fading using total integral
109. ancel and OK Buttons The four parameters Preheat temperature Temperature rate Maximum and Acquire time are interrelated The system will permit changing any of them to any reasonable value If an illogical combination of parameters is entered for example insufficient acquire time to achieve the maximum temperature WinREMS will warn you when you attempt to leave that TTP that an unacceptable heating cycle has been defined The values of these four parameters must satisfy the following inequality Acquire time gt Max Temp Preheat Temp Temp Rate Anneal The fields in this group box define the anneal portion of the TTP Temperature This field defines the temperature to which the gas will be heated after completion of the acquisition time Ifthe Anneal temperature is higher than the Maximum temperature the heating rate will be 50 C per second In the standard Reader this temperature is limited to 300 C An option is available that will enable heating to 400 C for use with Teflon based cards and extremity dosimeters Changing the Anneal temperature has no effect on the instrument s state of calibration Time This field defines the time in seconds that the instrument heats the TL Chip at the Anneal Temperature Changing the Anneal time has no effect on the instrument s state of calibration Calibration These fields report the results of the Reader Calibration procedure Section 6 4 Calibrate Reade
110. and RCF if applied This view is described in more detail in Section 7 3 1 1 Glow Curves Standard Report will activate the next group box Standard Reports described below Standard Reports This group box is activated only if you elected Standard Report in the Display As Group Box Figure 7 8 This box enables you to select either of two formats Computed Exposure displays readings dosimeter identification and the integral values of each dosimeter Figure 7 11 For a detailed explanation of the columns on this screen see Section 7 3 1 2 Computed Exposure Regions of Interest displays the integral values from each Region of Interest Figure 7 12 in addition to all the data displayed on the Computed Exposure View For an explanation of the unique information on this screen see Section 7 3 1 3 Regions of Interest There are three command buttons at the bottom of the Search Response Database Dialog Box Figure 7 8 OK will perform the selection according to the criteria entered and display the results in the format specified You may print or export all the selected records or a highlighted subset of the records in a variety of formats by following the instructions in the corresponding subsection of the File Menu Section 7 1 File Cancel will close the dialog box without selecting any records Help will activate the WinREMS Help System for this dialog box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREM
111. anging from 37 to 32767 can be entered frequencies between 200 and 5000 hertz can be readily heard by most people Duration of Sound The alarm sounds are composed of intermittent beeps This field defines the length of the beep in milliseconds Delay between Sounds This field defines the time between the beeps in milliseconds Total Time of Sound This field defines the length of time that the warning beeps continue before stopping automatically When you have set all the parameters for a tab click the OK Button to make your entries effective and to close the dialog box Missing Dosimeter Identification Enter Missing Dosimeter Identifications Card Id Element i Id ELement ii Id Element iii Id Element iv Id Cartridge Number Figure 8 23 Missing Dosimeter ID Dialog Box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 8 19 Operator s Manual 8 0 8800 Host Reference cont d 8 4 Options cont d 8 4 2 Mode Options Mode Options are an optional feature available only on those Readers that have an Internal Irradiator installed The purpose of these optional features is to automatically anneal irradiate and read dosimeters that are used for calibration purposes and quality control There are currently three Mode Options available These are e Auto Calibration e Auto QC e Auto Blank If your system does not have any of these optional features the Modes option is grayed ou
112. ant to ensure the stability of the light detection and the heating subsystems which is done by frequent Reference Light measurements and glow curve analyses respectively to ensure complete readout It is convenient to express 4 and 5 in terms of the quantity that is reported by the TLD Reader charge If Q is defined as the charge reported by the Reader for dosimeter j following its subjection to n irradiation units then TLR and lt TLR gt can be written in the form T LR 9j 6 n and lt Q gt lt TLR gt ES 7 when 1A pay Q 8 Using 6 7 and 8 4 can be written in the form Ecc lt 2 Po 9 J when lt Q gt is given by 8 Once ECCs are established for the Calibration Dosimeters each one has virtually the same TL efficiency and any statistically significant subset of Calibration Dosimeters can be used to generate ECCs for Field Dosimeters Let q be defined as the charge reported by the Reader for Field Dosimeter j following its subjection to n irradiation units Assume that a subset of the Calibration Dosimeters was also exposed at the same time and read together with the Field Dosimeters Since the time that lt Q gt was generated the Reader may have changed its response to TL photons as a result of intentional or accidental change in the High Voltage power supply setting replacement of damaged Photomultiplier Tubes replacement of IR filters or accumulation of dirt on the IR filters A
113. ariations in format a Formatting of data with justification and the inclusion of signs blanks and decimal points b Width minimum number of characters of the data field c Precision maximum number of characters or digits of the data field d Position of each data field left to right in the ASCII Export File Specifying the format is optional if a format is not specified a default format set up within WinREMS will be used Format specifications are discussed in Section 2 2 Output Format Specifications 2 1 Data Field Selection Data fields exist in the Response Database in two groups The first group known as the Common Section contains the fields that are common to all TLD elements of one dosimeter Table 6 The second group known as the Element specific Section contains fields that are associated with one element of the dosimeter Table 7 A complete Response Database Record consists of one Common Section and up to four Element specific Sections depending on the dosimeter In Model 3500 and 5500 TL Readers all records contain only one element in the Element specific Section In Model 4500 6600 and 8800 TL Readers all records contain four elements in the Element specific Section In an Export File a TLD record consists of only those data fields defined by the Export Configuration File TLDEXPT CFG 3500 5500 or EXPORTASCII CFG 4500 6600 8800 In other words an Export File record contains a s
114. art instrument for thermoluminescence dosimetry TLD measurement It combines high capacity and throughput capabilities with non contact heating A stream of hot nitrogen gas under precise temperature control is used to heat the TLD elements This heating method greatly increases the life of the TLD cards and provides greater reproducibility of the glow curves The system consists of two major com ponents the Card Reader and the WinREMS Windows Radiation Evaluation and Manage ment System software resident on a personal computer PC Up to 1400 cards may be loaded into the Reader for automatic operation The Reader simultaneously reads up to four TL elements on each card In addition to the Reader making direct measurements WinREMS will store analyze display and report the exposure for each a ip Sa element in a variety of formats Figure 1 1 shows the major components of the system The Model 8800 Reader is available in three different versions based on the type of dosimeter to be read All models read 4 chip TLD Cards both whole body and environmental Optional Models are available to which can also read EXT RAD or DXT RAD Extremity An additional option available on any model is an internal Sr Irradiator which may be used to irradiate dosimeters for calibration purposes Through WinREMS an 8800 Reader may be installed as part of a network of readers with or without a central server and may be networked with
115. at of the file is determined by a configuration file named EXPORTASCII CFG The location of the configuration file is shown on the Files Tab of the Workspace Properties Dialog Box Section 7 9 1 3 Files The default format supplied with the system as well as Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 5 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 1 File cont d 7 1 3 Export cont d instructions for generating a custom output format are contained in Appendix B ASCII Export File Files exported from the other three databases ECC Electronics QC and Log have a fixed format that cannot be re configured by the user SAAS File tld Files exported using this option are in binary form Records may be exported in this format from three databases Response ECC and electronics QC This format is used for temporary offline storage or to transfer data from one database file to another For example if you wished to move some data from one workspace to another you could export form one database and import to the other 7 1 4 Archive Restore Functions These functions are not operational in the current release of WinREMS 7 1 5 Print Functions These functions are all performed through normal Windows dialog boxes The information to be printed must first be selected using the Search function Section 7 3 Search The format of the report will be determined by the correspon
116. ate air circulation for the Reader s fans and space for the cables and nitrogen line allow a clear space of at least twelve inches on either side and at the back of the Reader Connect Reader to PC Attach the RS 232 cable to the 9 pin connector on the Host interface of the 8800 and to the COMI port on the controlling PC Be sure to use the connector s captive screws to ensure the integrity of data communications Connect nitrogen supply A supply of clean dry gas either nitrogen or air is required as the heating medium for reading TL Cards and Chipstrates This gas is also used as a purge for the PMT Assembly and cooling for the planchet area on the 8800 and the other end to the nitrogen supply regulator assembly The supply should provide a pres sure of at least 2 8 kg cm 40 psig and no more than 7 kg cm 90 psig The flow rate requirement depends on usage as listed in Section 2 1 1 Utilities NOTE Flow rate requirements are different for different Harshaw Instruments It is strongly recommended especially in high humidity environments that nitrogen remain flowing through the system at all times This is because nitrogen is used to purge the PMT Assembly keeping moisture out of this critical area Connect to line power Make sure that the On Off switch on the back of the Reader is in the OFF position Connect the socket side of the three prong IEC 320 AC power input cord to the back panel of the Rea
117. atent or other license of Thermo Electron or others Specifications are subject to change without notice Thermo Electron Corporation reserves all copyrights to this material It may not be duplicated without express prior written permission Part Number Revision Thermo Electron M 26773 G RMP Technical Content Approved By C Copyright Thermo Electron Corporation 2002 All rights reserved Printed in U S A Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 0 1 Operator s Manual FOREWORD Introduction This manual provides you with all the information you need to properly operate the Harshaw Model 8800 Manual TLD Reader when controlled through WinREMS Windows based Radiation Evaluation and Management System WinREMS is SGCD Radiation Measurement Products RMP proprietary operating system operating on a personal computer and connected to the Reader via a serial port This manual is released concurrently with WinREMS version PL 26732 8 0 0 0 You may confirm the version number of your system on the Help About screen Section 7 11 3 About This manual is also concurrent with the second release of the Windows NT based Host Computer This version is recognizable by the Windows look on the Reader monitor This Operator s Manual is structured so that a novice can use it to become acquainted with the instrument at a comfortable pace yet the more experienced user will find that it
118. atic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 1 9 Operator s Manual 1 0 Introduction cont d 1 5 Dosimeters cont d 1 5 3 DXT RAD Extremity Dosimeters Another type of Extremity Dosimeter available with this system is the Harshaw DXT RAD Extremity Dosimeter as shown in Figure 1 11 A TLD pellet is bonded to a Kapton film A flat ring is also bonded to the Kapton surrounding the TL pellet This ring has a unique 5 digit identification number visible in both barcode and numeric format This TL element assembly is placed in a recess in an adjustable finger ring A plastic cap is pressed into the recess to provide hermetic sealing of the TL chip and a 2X magnification to aid in reading the Chip ID Typical TLD elements used in this application are 0 015 thick TLD 100 chips and TLD 700H bonded powder others are available The finger ring is made of durable low density polypropylene plastic and is adjustable to fit finger sizes from 16 to 28 mm in diameter It is available in a variety of colors to identify different body areas A manual fixture is provided to insert and remove the dosimeter and cap The completed assembly may be sterilized by either hot up to 120 C vapor or cold procedures Figure 1 11 DXT RAD Extremity Dosimeter Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 1 10 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 1 0 Introduction cont d 1 6 Instrument Performance Specifications Dyn
119. bases newlocation a 5500 ascii test asc A testprocess asc File name Save as type Text File asc nd Text File asc Cc Export Range SAAS File tld C All Selected Figure 7 5 Export Response Record Dialog Box Cancel 7 1 3 Export To use the Export File function you must first select a set of records using the Search function Section 7 3 1 Response Database The selected records may then be exported in either ASCII or SAAS format as described below Selecting File Export from the Main Menu will bring an Open File Dialog Box into view Figure 7 5 In addition to the normal Windows Browse capability which allows you to set the name and location of the file there are the following two fields Export Range Choosing All will export all the records retrieved by the Search function Choosing Selected will export only those retrieved records that are highlighted See Section 3 1 2 Highlighting Records Save as Type This Field determines the format of the records that will be exported There are two options Text File asc and SAAS File tld operating as follows Text File asc This option will export records from any of four databases Response ECC Electronics QC and Log The records will be in ASCII format suitable for additional processing by other data processing applications For records exported from the Response Database the structure form
120. ber Reading Function Element Flags RCF Value ECC Value Response Response Unit ASCII Export File Default Format 3500 and 5500 Readers Variable Default Variable Description Initial Source Integer Harshaw Reader Model 3500 Automatic or 5500 command line Setup 16 character string Chipset Format yyyymmdd Automatic PC Date Long Format hhmmss Automatic PC Time 1 to 1000 Chipset Integer 1 Read Dosimeters Acquisition 2 Calibrate Reader Setup 3 Calibrate Dosimeters 4 Generate Calibration Dosimeters 5 Anneal Dosimeters Internal use only Automatic 99 999 Float 99 999 Automatic ECC File Float 99999 999 Automatic Calculated Char nC gU MR mrad TTP mrem uSv UG Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page A 7 Operator s Manual Appendix B ASCII Export File 1 0 Default File cont d NT_T YPE MSdN ENT ID 1 1s T 1 2 Models 4500 6600 and 7272 NUMBER Ad 8800 LEMENT ENABLED 1d The specific content of the LEMENT E EDY a exported file is defined by a RATION OPTIONS MAYEN O 0 VYA configuration file named DING DATE Y m d EXPORTASCII CFG The default a version of this file is shown in ID 12 12s Figure 3 FUNCTION c The Configuration File in aah Figure 3 would produce a file as shown in Figure 4 Fields in E the export fil
121. ble computer connected through a standard RS 232 serial communi cation port The dosimetry functions are divided between the Reader and the specialized WinREMS software that runs on the PC All dosimetric data storage instrument control and operator inputs are performed on the PC signal acquisition and conditioning are performed in the Reader 1 4 WinREMS The Reader generates TL data and transmits it to WinREMS where it can be monitored as it is received WinREMS then stores the data for future reference and reporting WinREMS controls the operations of the Reader including storing the operating parameters Time Temperature Profiles TTPs Reader Calibration Factors RCFs and Element Correction Coefficients ECCs WinREMS also performs a variety of calibration and Quality Assurance operations WinREMS enables Readers to share databases and export TL data as it is generated Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 1 4 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 1 0 Introduction cont d 1 5 Dosimeters Depending on the option selected the Model 8800 is capable of reading EXT RAD and DXT RAD Extremity Dosimeters as well as Whole Body and Environmental TLD Cards This section describes each of these types of dosimeters 1 5 1 Whole Body and Environmental Dosimeters Whole Body and Environmental Dosimeter Assemblies consist of two parts a TLD Card and a Holder The TLD card consists of four TL hot pressed ch
122. bration Range Region of Interest A Region of Interest ROI is a subrange of the 200 channels 1 200 in which data is collected to form a complete glow curve An integral will be reported for each of the specified ROIs You may establish up to four ROIs for each channel Changing a region of interest does not affect the calibration of the TTP Calibration Region The Calibration Region is the range of the total glow curve used for calibration and is the region over which the total integral is calculated While it is recommended that the entire 200 channels be used in calculating the integral you can select the actual Calibration Region Different Calibration Regions may be selected for each of the four positions Changing a Calibration Region will make the TTP uncalibrated subject to the OK and Cancel buttons Figure 7 26 TLD Card showing chip positions Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 32 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 5 Read cont d 7 5 3 TTP Setup cont d Data acquisition begins immediately at the end of preheat time Changing the Preheat time will change a calibrated A region is defined by selecting the first and last data channels to be included in the region for each of the four TL Chip positions on a card i ii iii iv Different regions may be selected for each ofthe four positions The beginning and end points must be in a logical relatio
123. c De 2nesadua 100 Channel TO SET ROls Press appropriate key left click mouse button drag release Double click to return ROI Green None R012 Orange SHIFT ROIS Hot Pink CTRL ROI4 Yellow ALT Figure 7 10 Adjustable ROI View Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 11 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 3 Search cont d 7 3 1 Response Database cont d 7 3 1 2 Computed Exposures In viewing the Computed Exposure Report Figure 7 11 the following defines the column headings X This column is reserved for flags that will identify any readings that are out of their specified range See Section 4 2 2 Acquisition Setup for a description of how to set the limits that generate these flags The possible flags and their definitions are as follows h indicates that the Halt Instrument limit was triggered r indicates that the Reread Dosimeter limit was triggered and that this record is a reread record of the dosimeter that triggered the flag t indicates that this is a reread record and is the last reread record allowed by E Computed Exposure 1 the reread parameter This flag always appears in combination with an r flag m indicates that the Mark With a Warning Flag Limit was triggered or that Background Subtraction generated a negative result which was reported as zero o applies to QC Card Blank
124. ce located at a calibration laboratory should be established The calibration laboratory is able to perform the irradiations and report the delivered quantity in terms of the desired quantity for example dose dose equivalent exposure etc A subset of the Calibration Dosimeters in their holders if applicable is exposed to dose D from a calibrated source for example B Cs and read out The Reader reports its findings in units of gU using 15 however since the value of D as reported by the calibration laboratory is known one can establish the following relations between the local units gU and the dose in units of Gy or any other quantity with the appropriate unit L E 16 for the gU to dose conversion factor Note that K is expressed in units of gU Gy and provides the link between the local source and the calibration laboratory in a similar way that the RCF value provides the link between the internal units of the Reader counts or charge and the local source For charge integration systems the RCF is expressed in units of nC gU the quantity RCF K is expressed in terms of nC Sievert and provides the link between the internal units of the Reader and the dose D _ ap ECC 3 RCFxK If the Reader is routinely calibrated directly in terms of nC Gy then there is no need to establish the relationship shown in 16 Note that since the definition of the gU unit is based on exposing some Calibration Dosimeters to th
125. cian can analyze the steps that lead to any operational problems Trapezoidal Move process profiling ended normally Trapezoidal Move process initiated with neither card detection nor position z Trapezoidal Move command accepted for processing From DXTRAD Box command to turn repeater on accepted for processing T Barcode types command accepted for processing Trapezoidal Move process rack reached specified destination within allowa Trapezoidal Move process profiling ended normally Automatic sensor status report sent to host due to change sensor status cha Automatic sensor status report sent to host due to change sensor status cha Automatic sensor status report sent to host due to change sensor status cha Trapezoidal Move process both card detection sensors first active together Trapezoidal Move process card detection sensor O first became active duri Automatic sensor status report sent to host due to change sensor status cha Trapezoidal Move process initiated with card detection to be attempted but n Trapezoidal Move command accepted for processina Host Command Histor AAA Transport History Command History Unknown Figure 8 7 History Queue View Screen Text EE PAGA A E O E ee E es PE E TDF 1D 173 175 OSC oC OSC 162 158 OSC 156 150 144 19 05C 05C O5C 183 179 175 05C 05C 157 150 IE1 109 05C OCS 05C OC7 OSC 0C2 086 179 Figure 8 8 History Queue View Screen Hex Model
126. containing only tritium or not more than 100 microcuries of other beta and or gamma emitting material or 10 microcuries of alpha emitting material and devices held in storage in the original shipping container prior to initial installation need not be tested for any purpose 3 Shall assure that the tests required by paragraph c 2 of this section and other testing installation servicing and removal from installation involving the radioactive materials its shielding or containment are performed 1 In accordance with the instructions provided by the labels or ii by a person holding a specific license pursuant to Parts 30 and 32 of this chapter or from an Agreement State to perform such activities 4 Shall maintain records showing compliance with the requirements of paragraphs c 2 and 3 of this section The records shall show the results of test The records also shall show the dates of performance of and the names of persons performing testing installation servicing and removal from installation concerning the radioactive material its shielding or containment Records of test for leakage of radioactive material required by paragraph c 2 of this section shall be maintained for one year after the next required leak test is performed or until the sealed source is transferred or disposed of Records of tests of the on off mechanism and indicator required by paragraph c 2 of this section shall be maintained f
127. ction provided by the equipment may be impaired 1 Establish working location The 8800 Reader is designed for standalone mounting and requires a connection to the controlling PC Locate a space on the floor that is within a comfortable working distance from the PC The RS 232 cable provided with the 8800 is 25 feet long If the PC is to be located more than 25 feet from the 8800 then a longer cable will be required To avoid any data transfer problems the cable should be no longer than 50 feet Note however that the cable must not exceed 7 5 meters for CE compliance The Reader which measures 75 cm 29 25 inches wide by 105 cm 41 25 inches high and 35 cm 13 75 inches deep requires a minimum of 32 cm 12 inches clearance at the rear and along the sides for ventilation and accessibility to the On Off Switch and the power cord Unpack the workstation components Carefully remove the 8800 Reader and other items from their shipping con tainers and check the contents against your order and the shipping papers 3 Inspect parts for any obvious damage If damage is evident contact the carrier for a shipment inspection Retain all packing materials waybills etc to verify claim Then contact your Thermo Electron Corp RM amp P field representative for assistance in repair or replacement of damaged items Select line voltage and fuse The instrument can be powered by 100 120 220 or 240 VAC at 50 or 60 Hertz The
128. ction based on Patient IDs However patient ID records are not used with the model 8800 TL Response This field enables you to select records based on the actual reading of a dosimeter The units for this selection are those that were applied when the dosimeter was read If for example the Reader was not calibrated the units will be nanocoulombs But if the reader was calibrated in mrem then the comparison will be made based on mrems There are three options Element enables you to select records based on the response of any one or all four of the elements on a TL Card For EXT RAD Records use Any Element to include both elements or Element i1 or Element iii to select a specific element position Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 8 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 3 Search cont d 7 3 1 Response Database cont d No Limits will include all dosimeters subject to the limitations of other fields Range will allow you to select all readings within a given range for the selected element s Display as This field enables you to select the format of the output you wish to see There are two options Glow Curves will display one record at a time in the format shown in Figure 7 9 This shows the actual glow curve and the temperature curve for each element the computed data for the total integral and any selected ROIs and the ECC
129. d All dosimeters will be read using the selected TTP Calibrate Reader is used to read Calibration Dosimeters for calibrating a TTP Only the ECC should be applied in the Apply Calibration group box Field Dosimeters are rejected Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 25 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 5 Read cont d 7 5 2 Acquisition Setup cont d Anneal Dosimeters will read all types of dosimeters ECC and RCF may be applied but generally are not useful for this purpose All dosimeters are read with the selected TTP Extremity This checkbox is used to indicate that the dosimeters being read are extremity dosimeters Chipstrates or Ringlets Edited By This field displays the name of the last person to edit this setup based on the name entered in the Password Dialog Box Date Edited This field is automatically updated whenever any field in this dialog box is edited Apply Calibration You may enter checks in either of these boxes to apply these calibrations The element Correction Coefficient ECC and the Reader Calibration Factor RCF must be applied according to the guidelines in Table 7 2 RCF Applying the RCF Reader Calibration Factor will report the results calibrated in the units shown in the Units Field of the Time Temperature Dialog Box Figure 7 25 Applying the RCF requires that the TTP be calibrated ECC Th
130. d on the mean response of the Calibration Cards Therefore all calibration cards in one workspace must be calibrated together So if you already have some Calibration Extremity Dosimeters you may prefer to select all cards read with the Acquisition Mode set to Generate Calibration Dosimeters rather than select based on Group ID 10 Set Calibration Screen From the Main Menu select Calibration Generate Cal Dosimeters to bring the Generate Calibration Dosimeters Dialog Box Figure 7 28 into view Click on the Extremity Field to put a check Y in the box Enter an Acceptable ECC Range for the position you used This value will determine the deviation from the mean 1 0 that will be considered acceptable for Calibration Extremity Dosimeters Enter the range as the Upper and Lower Limits for example 0 9 1 11 Generally this range should be narrower for Calibration Dosimeters than for Field Dosimeters You may still use Dosimeters which fall outside of this range as Field Dosimeters 11 Initiate Calculations Click on the Compute Button to calculate the ECCs with the new range All records that are within the Acceptable Range will be highlighted those outside the range will not If you do not like the results you may change the Upper and Lower Limits and calculate the ECCs again You may repeat this process until you are satisfied with the results For a detailed explanation of all the fields on this screen see Section 7 6
131. der Insert the other end of the power cord into the line power source Be sure that the ground socket of the power source is adequately grounded 9 Connect 8800 Host Interface Mount the monitor and keyboard for the Reader s Host Computer on top of the Reader Plug the power cord for the monitor into the receptacle designated for this purpose on the power panel at the back of the Reader Connect the monitor signal cable and the keyboard signal cable to the matching connectors on the back of the Reader Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 2 4 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 2 0 Installation cont d 2 2 Reader Setup cont d Connect the mouse and printer cables to their respective connectors on the Host interface 10 Turn on power Push the On Off switch into the ON position to start the instrument It is advisable to check the setting of the PC s clock calendar at this time This should always be set correctly as all TLD records are date time stamped This completes the initial hardware setup If WinREMS has been installed on the controlling PC the Model 8800 Reader is ready to run If WinREMS has not been installed follow the instructions on the distribution diskette to install WinREMS 2 3 PC Requirements The minimum requirements for a personal computer used for controlling the Model 8800 Reader and its operating software WinREMS are as follows e 100 compatibility with Intel
132. dialog box without accepting any changes made since the Apply Button was used Serial Communications Port com y Instrument Identifier 55 Figure 7 39 Instrument Options Dialog Box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 54 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 9 Workspace cont d 7 9 1 Properties cont d 7 9 1 1 Instrument cont d Serial Communications Port Each Reader is connected via a serial cable to a Com Port on its computer This field identifies which Com Port on the computer is connected to the Reader Instrument Identifier The purpose of this field is to uniquely identify the Reader running under this workspace This identification is carried with all data generated by the Reader Once this identification is established it should not be changed unless a different reader is connected to the system 7 9 1 2 Databases Select the Databases Tab to view the file name and path for the five databases that exist for a workspace Figure 7 40 You may edit these fields to change database names and locations These fields must identify valid databases you cannot create databases or paths on this dialog box New databases can only be created using the New Workspace Wizard Section 7 1 1 Workspace The fields on this box are defined as follows Print Computed Exposure Print Electronics QC Print ECCs Instrument Response DB The Response
133. diator If your Reader is equipped with the Optional Sr Irradiator you must have a specific license to posses this device As a specific licensee you must comply with all the provisions in the appropriate NRC 10CFR documents or the equivalent regulations ofan agreement State You must also comply with state and local regulations if any and the terms and conditions of your specific license Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 0 13 Operator s Manual Writing Conventions To maintain consistency throughout this and all SGCD RMP manuals certain writing conventions have been followed These are listed below for your convenience When instructions are given for using DOS or any other operating system the following conventions are used e When a specific operating system command file name directory name or environment variable is used in the text it is shown in small caps for example C NVLAP NVLAP EXE e When a general operating system command file name directory name or environment variable is used in the text it is shown in italics for example drive path filename When a specific example of an operating system entry is given it is offset from the paragraph and shown in Courier font for example gt copy a asc When describing Harshaw software such as NET REMS the following conventions are used e Screen Names Pull Down Menu Selections and Field Names
134. dify Paste creates a record from the copy buffer This field is gray inactive unless you have previously clicked on the Copy Button Clicking on this button loads the copied setup into all the fields and displays Copy Setup in the Title Field There are three buttons at the bottom of the dialog box that act on the entire set of Acquisition Setup Records that is now in active memory OK Clicking on this button will save the current set of records with your changes and will close the dialog box Cancel Clicking on this button will remove any changes you have made to the current set of records returning all records to their state as of the last time OK was clicked and will close the dialog box Help Clicking on this button will activate the help system for this dialog box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 29 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 5 Read cont d 7 5 3 TTP Setup Select Read then TTP Setup to bring the TTP Setup Dialog Box Figure 7 25 into view Alternatively you may click on the TTP button on the toolbar Before the dialog box appears you will be prompted for a user name and password After a valid entry you will have access to the screen in edit mode If you do not have a valid name and password you may click on the Cancel Button for access in view mode This dialog box enables you to modify the Time Temperature Profile T
135. ding Format File as shown in the corresponding tab in the Workspace Properties Dialog Box Section 7 9 1 5 Print files The Headers Footers and Captions may also be modified in this dialog box 7 1 6 Recent Files The last area of the menu lists the most recent workspaces opened Clicking on any of these will open that workspace us WinREMS chnpp wrw File MEGA Search View Fee Undo Ctrl Z Redo Ctrl Cut Ctrl Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V Clear Delete Select All Ctrl 4 Figure 7 6 Edit Menu 7 2 Edit The functions on the Edit Menu Figure 7 6 are not operational in the current release of WinREMS Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 6 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 3 Search The items on the Search Menu Figure 7 7 enable you to search through four of the databases in the system and select a limited set of records based on parameters appropriate to the database The selected records may then be viewed in three different formats exported and printed 7 3 1 Response Database All the TLD records in WinREMS are stored in the Response Database Select Search Response Database to bring up the Search Response Database Dialog Box Figure 7 8 You may select all the records in the database by setting the Group ID Dosimeter Usage and Acquisition Mode Fields to All and setting the Date Time Dosimeter ID Patient ID and TL Response fiel
136. dosimeters not accepted in the calculations since the last time the Compute Button was clicked There are two possible reasons for rejection e The ECC fell outside of the range designated at the bottom of the dialog box Wi Generate Calibration Dosimeters 1 Results Dosimeter ID ECC fi ECC fii 0014190 9057 9776 0014191 e The Dosimeter was read with the wrong Mode Mean This row displays the average TL values of the currently accepted dosimeters for each position Standard Deviation This field displays the percent standard deviation of the TL values of the currently accepted dosimeters for each position gt Reading Statistics Total ja Accepted 20 Mean Rejected fi Standard Deviation ii PMT Noise Readings Total la Mean Standard Deviation Reference Light Readings Total la Mean Standard Deviation 11 229 Upper Limit fi 43 1 43 T Extremity Lower Limit fo 77 fo 77 i Accept Close Help pm o5 hes fi 2358 Masa paan EM CE pa fa mp ka 7 Kami Figure 7 28 Generate Calibration Dosimeters Dialog Box TLD Card Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 38 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 6 Calibration cont d 7 6 1 Generate Cal Dosimeters cont d PMT Noise Readings The fields in this group box all relate to the PMT Noise Readings highlighted on the Search Resu
137. ds boxes to No Limits By selecting limited values in some or all of these fields you may select a Search View Read Calibration Response Database ECC Database Log Database Electronics QC Database Figure 7 7 Search Menu small segment of the total database and reduce searching time The fields in this dialog box operate as follows Group ID This field contains the names of Groups as entered on the Read Dosimeters Dialog Box Figure 7 21 Search Response Database x Group ID an Groups y Dosimeter Usage Field Dosimeter y Acquisition Mode Read Field Dosimeters y Date Time C NoLimits After Range 12 31 00 11 59 00 PM 12 31 01 11 59 00 PM Dosimeter ID C NoLimits Single Value Range 72000 73000 m Patient ID NoLimits Single Value Range A TL Response Any Element y O No Limits C Range fp F m Display as C Glow Curves Standard Reports Computed Exposure Regions of Interest Cancel Help Figure 7 8 Search Response Database Dialog Box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 7 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 3 Search cont d 7 3 1 Response Database cont d Dosimeter Usage In this field you may select All readings or any one type of dosimeter The available dosimeter types are PMT Noise Refere
138. e Dosimeters to clear them of all residual exposure by processing them through a Reader with the appropriate TTP Table 6 1 You may use two EXT RAD or four DXT RAD positions for this part of the procedure 2 Store Dosimeters Between preparation anneal and irradiation store the dosimeters in a subdued UV environment at a temperature no higher than 30 C 3 Expose Dosimeters Expose the Dosimeters to a known radiation source e g 500 mR of Cs within two hours of annealing them Expose all Extremity Dosimeters in the same card position 4 Store Dosimeters Store the Dosimeters for the time established above in a subdued UV environment at a temperature no higher than 30 C 5 Read Dosimeters The Dosimeters may now be read for calibration purposes Model 8800 Automatic TLD Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 6 13 Operator s Manual 6 0 Calibration Procedures cont d 6 3 Extremity Dosimeters cont d 6 3 2 Generate Calibration Extremity Dosimeters This section describes the specific steps to generate Calibration Extremity Dosimeters These Ringlets typically constitute 1 2 of the entire population and are retained at the dosimetry center for use in instrument calibration With a new Reader the creation of a set of Extremity Dosimeters will initiate the Database No special action on the part of the operator is required 1 Prepare Dosimeters Prepare and expose the Extremity Dosimeter
139. e ECC Element Correction Coefficient corrects the readings for variations among dosimeters Applying the ECC requires that the dosimeters be calibrated The ECC and RCF may be applied independently of each other Employee ID This feature is not implemented in the current release of WinREMS Export The fields in this group box define the name and location of an export file that will be generated as readings are being taken Format This pull down field defines the format for a file that will be exported as data is being acquired The options are none and text File Path If text is selected in the Export Format Field you must enter a File Path The file name will be generated automatically and will consist of the Instrument ID and the Group ID with the extension asc Print Format The selection in this field determines the format of that data that is printed during acquisition The available options are None Glow Curves Regions of Interest and Computed Exposure PMT Noise The information entered in these boxes establishes the alarm conditions for the PMT Noise Readings Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 26 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 5 Read cont d 7 5 2 Acquisition Setup cont d Interval This field establishes the number of dosimeters to be read between PMT Noise Readings When any valu
140. e are separated by a comma and a blank records are separated by a carriage return CR The fields are described in more detail in Table 2 an an C R RI D S RI R F a a Fh 0 oA Fh o OP FH A a Fh oe 2 2 EI XX Ww EI O Xd td EI ww HOQMAQMAQMAQHRCOMMPME NHNAANRNAANAANAAYPWHDPDPHE gt 7 4 A UNIT MASA TUT Dm T Figure 3 Default Export file Configuration File 4500 6600 and 8800 Readers M8800 8 1 1 3 0 0 20000511 152325 Gr 000E4000 46 253063 1 000E 000 1 000 47 591000 1 3 709438 000E4000 649750 nc M8800 8 1 1 3 0 0 20000511 152434 Gn 000E 000 1 585377 1 000E 000 1 000 52 095062 1 056938 000E 000 1 65 307999 nc M8800 8 1 1 3 0 0 20000511 152545 Gr 000E 000 53 076126 1 000E 000 1 000 42 551876 1 491249 000E 000 56 943001 nc M8800 8 1 1 1 3 0 0 200005 52658 ngn 000E 000 1 000 64 422249 1 000E 000 1 000 387814 1 392250 000E 000 1 000 47 107189 nc M8800 8 3 o 0 200005 LA r r r 52811 Ng NG 000E 000 1 000 57 896439 1 000E 000 1 000 54 911251 119499 000E 000 1 000 54 595688 nc Figure4 Default ASCII
141. e local source following a reproducible procedure the time intervals between preparation and irradiation and between irradiation and readout are not important as long as they are kept constant If it is not possible to keep the fading constant it may be eliminated by removing the low temperature peaks Also note that the time interval between irradiation at the calibration laboratory and readout does not have to be the same as the time interval used for generating the RCF The reason is that the gU is defined for a specific time interval between irradiation and readout and as long as this time interval is kept constant the definition of gU will not change Fading corrections have to be applied or the low temperature peaks have to be removed only if the values of K are used to calculate the reported dose from a Field dosimeter In this case the difference in fading created by the difference between the two time intervals the interval between field irradiation and readout and the interval between laboratory irradiation and readout must be corrected This may be done either mathematically or by removing the low temperature peaks 17 Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 1 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference This section defines all the fields on every WinREMS screen and dialog box Itis arranged in the sequence of the Main Menu Figure 7 2 We are assuming that you have a basic
142. e other than 0 is entered the Reader will take PMT Noise Readings at the specified interval and before and after a group of dosimeters is read PMT Noise Readings may be eliminated by entering O Range There are two boxes for each position representing the low and high ends of the acceptable range expressed in picocoulombs If any PMT Noise reading 1s outside these limits the Reader will stop taking readings and sound an audible alarm The response record will be flagged with a o The correct setting for any Reader should be based on experience The lower end of the range should not be set to zero as it will not detect any hardware failure which would result in an open circuit Reference light The information entered in these boxes establishes the alarm conditions for the Reference light Readings The specific value of these readings is not important but they should be consistent within 10 of the average value for any instrument Any abrupt change indicates a need for maintenance Interval This field establishes the number of dosimeters to be read between Reference Light Readings When any value other than O is entered the Reader takes Reference Light Readings at the specified interval and before and after a group of dosimeters is read Reference Light Reading may be eliminated by entering 0 Range There are two boxes for each position representing the low and high ends of the acceptable range ex
143. e same dosimeter up to the number of times set on this line if the reading stays above the set value Each reading creates a new response record and each reread record is flagged with an r If the number of rereads should reach the limit set in this field then the response record will also be flagged with a t The purpose of this limit is to remove any excess residual signal from a dosimeter that has been exposed to an unusually high dose Current Setup When the Acquisition Setup Dialog Box is on the screen it is important to note that all Acquisition Setup Records are loaded in active memory The four control buttons in this box apply only to the record currently in view The three buttons below this box apply to all the Acquisition Setup Records New creates a record Clicking on this button will clear the dialog box of all data without deleting the record currently in view and will create a new Acquisition Setup Record This record will have the name New Setup in the Title Field which you may edit to any name you choose for your new Acquisition Setup Delete deletes a record Clicking on this button will delete the current setup from active memory and display the next setup If no setups remain after the deletion a default setup will be displayed Copy copies a record Clicking on this button will create a second version of the current setup in active memory which you may then paste rename and mo
144. e you choose for your new TTP Delete deletes a TTP record Clicking on this button will delete the current setup from active memory and display the next TTP If there are no TTPs left after the deletion a default TTP will be created Copy copies a TTP record to copy buffer Clicking on this button will create a second version of the current setup in active memory which you may then paste rename modify and save Paste creates a TTP record from copy buffer This field is inactive or grayed out unless you have previously clicked on the Copy Button Clicking on the Paste Button loads the copied TTP into all the fields assigns a new number and displays Copy TTP in the Title Field There are three buttons at the bottom of the screen that act on the entire set of TTP Records in current memory OK Clicking on this button will save the current set of records and close the dialog box Cancel Clicking on this button will discard any changes you have made to all setup records and will close the dialog box No changes to any setup will be saved Help Clicking on this button will activate the WinREMS Help system Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 35 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 5 Read cont d 7 5 4 Retransmit The last record read is always retained in the Reader until a new reading is initiated This prevents data from being l
145. each dosimeter the geometry relative to the source is kept constant and the radiation field is penetrating enough to deposit energy in the entire dosimetric volume Note that because the measured TL effect is the sum over the entire sensitive volume of the TLD the energy deposition profile does not have to be uniform as long as it is similar for each dosimeter Let ECC be the Element Correction Coefficient for Dosimeter j 1 2 m where m is the number of Calibration Dosimeters and let TLE and TLR be the TL efficiency and the TL response of Dosimeter j respectively By definition then Gs lt TLE gt J TLE 2 when IA lt TLE gt x TLE 3 l j m j l With the aid of 1 2 and 3 can be written in the form C _ lt TLR gt TIR 4 when 1 lt ILR gt x TLR 5 Mm j 1 Model 8800 Automatic TLD Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 6 21 Operator s Manual 6 0 Calibration Procedures cont d 6 4 Calibration Methodology cont d 6 4 1 Element Correction Coefficients cont d Note that the implicit assumption in writing 4 and 5 is that the Reader response to TL photons did not change during the measurement of the entire population of the Calibration Dosimeters i e k remains constant during the entire TL readout process Since this step is the most critical to the success of generating true ECCs it is important to perform it in a relatively short period of time It is also import
146. ecay rate Glow Curve View Model 8801 View Control MEI Options Q Es l Initiate a BIRO ning Figure 8 17 Expose Menu Value This field defines the amount of radiation to which the cards will be exposed When you set the Exposure Mode to Value it is a data entry field otherwise it is a display field The units of exposure as set in the Expose Setup Dialog Box Figure 8 20 are displayed to the right of this field Time This field defines the length of time for which the cards are exposed When you set the Exposure Mode to Time it is a data entry field otherwise it is a display field Start This command button is used to initiate the Expose process The TLD cards will be irradiated sequentially according to the preset time or value When the process begins the screen shown in Figure 8 19 will appear with the following fields Expose Initiate Exposure Mode Time Value 668 5 mR Cancel Time fos seconds ter Figure 8 18 Expose Initiate Dialog Box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 8 15 Operator s Manual 8 0 8800 Host Reference cont d 8 3 Expose Function cont d 8 3 1 Initiate cont d Exposure Value Exposure Time These two fields display the Exposure Value and Time as established on the Expose Initiate Dialog Box Exposing Card Number This field is a simple counter showing the number of cards exposed including the c
147. ecification This may require that you repeat Steps 12 and 13 with different values for the Acceptable ECC Range NOTE When performing Step 14 you must ensure that no workstations are reading dosimeters with ECCs applied The calibration process takes a few seconds and no workstations are able to access the ECC Database during that time If a reader attempts to access the ECC database while it is being updated it may time out and stop operations 14 Accept Values When you are satisfied with the results click on the Accept Button to apply the data to the database 15 Remove Cards Remove the cards from the Reader Model 8800 Automatic TLD Reader with WinREMS Page 6 20 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 6 0 Calibration Procedures cont d 6 4 Calibration Methodology 6 4 1 Element Correction Coefficients Since not all TL dosimeters can be manufactured to have exactly the same TL efficiency where TL efficiency TLE is defined as the emitted TL light intensity per unit of absorbed dose individual Element Correction Coefficients ECCs must be defined developed and applied A typical batch of TL dosimeters has a variation in TL efficiency of 10 15 one relative standard deviation This spread can be reduced to 1 2 by application of ECCs The method of ECC generation is based on relating the TL efficiency of each TL dosimeter of the entire dosimeter population Field Dosimeters to the mean TL efficiency o
148. ecords by following the instructions in the corresponding subsection of the File Menu Section 7 1 File D A G Light Noise VDC Reference Reading Reading YDC nC nC 14 93 15 16 0 370 0 065 14 93 15 0 368 0 026 1494 15 0 330 0032 329 0 040 25 32 25 29 24 95 25 04 05 27 2000 08 01 36 AM 6600 9912183 i 844 844 844 844 389 0 007 390 0 008 341 0 012 342 0 011 09 44 21 AM 6600 9912183 i 21 70 ii 21 73 21 68 21 66 844 844 845 845 387 389 323 327 Figure 7 18 Electronics QC Database View Screen Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 20 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 4 View The choices on this menu are only activated when a set of Response Records has been selected for viewing Section 7 3 1 Response Database The selections are described in the following subsections 7 4 1 Glow Curves If either the Regions of Interest View Figure 7 12 or Computed Exposures View Figure 7 11 is currently displayed selecting this item will bring the Glow Curves View Figure 7 9 to the screen For a full description of this screen see Section 7 3 1 1 Glow Curves 7 4 2 Regions of Interest If either the Glow Curves View Figure 7 9 or the Computed Exposures View Figure 7 11 is currently displayed selecting this item will bring the Regions of Interest View Figu
149. ect the Acquisition Setup established in Step 5 You may click on the Comment Button to add any comment you wish Read Dosimeters Click on the Start button The Reader will begin to read the Dosimeters Close File and Exit When the Reader has completed reading all the dosimeters click on the Cancel Button to close the dialog box Table 6 6 9 10 Select Calibration Records From the Main Menu select Search Response Records to bring up the Search Response Records Database Dialog Box Figure 7 8 Enter the Group ID created in Step 6 and fill in other fields as follows Field Entry Dosimeter Type All Acquisition Mode All TL Response Any Element Display as Standard Report Standard Reports Computed Exposure Click on the OK Button This will bring all the records in the selected group into view Highlight all the records in the group Set Calibration Parameters From the Main Menu select Calibration Reader Calibration to bring up the Reader Calibration Dialog Box Figure 7 29 Acquisition Setup Conditions for Calibrating the Reader a eee S a a U a Acquisition Mode Calibrate Reader Apply Calibration Apply ECC Extremity Enabled Employee ID Disabled Export Format None PMT Noise Interval 1 PMT Noise Range 10 to 2000 picoCoulombs Ref Light Interval 1 Ref Light Range Varies with instrument QC Card Interval 0 QC Card Range Not applicable Blank Card Interval 0 B
150. ed dialog boxes Users have access to all dialog boxes except Password Maintenance OK Clicking on this button will add the new user to the system and leave the box open for further additions Close Clicking on this button will close the box deleting any data that was entered since the last time the OK Button was clicked 7 9 2 2 Delete a User To delete a user select the user you wish to delete from the list in the user selection field on the Password Maintenance Dialog Box Figure 7 45 Click on the Delete Button A message box will appear asking you to confirm that you want to delete the named user Click on the Yes Button and a message box will appear confirming the deletion 7 9 2 3 Modify User Click on the Modify Button on the Password Maintenance Dialog Box Figure 7 45 to bring the Modify User Dialog Box Figure 7 47 into view You may modify any or all of the fields in this box The fields in this box operate exactly the same as the fields in the Add a New User Dialog Box Modify User Ea Username Carol Password Confirm Password r Member Of Administrators Isers Cancel Help Figure 7 47 Modify User Dialog Box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 59 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d Window H New Window Cascade Tile Horizontally 7 10 Window All of the items on this menu Figure 7 48 are standard
151. eed Other software installed Problem Documentation What function were you attempting to perform Is the error reproducible after re booting Give as complete a description as possible including specific menu items selected and buttons pressed What error messages did you encounter Save all printed error reports and do a Print Screen if possible otherwise list all error messages encountered in the order they appeared What are the relevant setup parameters for this instrument for example Acquisition Setup and or TTP Setup Do a Print Screen if possible Also print a copy of the WinREMS Workspace file wrw by right clicking on the file in Windows Explorer and selecting Print Need assistance Call Thermo Electron Corp RM amp P Customer Support 800 435 5656 or 440 248 7400 Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page A 2 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual Appendix A BLANK PAGE Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page A 3 Operator s Manual Appendix B ASCII Export File This appendix to the operator s manual supplies detailed information about the use of the ASCII export capabilities of the WinREMS operating system installed on Harshaw TLD Readers This document covers only exports from the Response Record Database Section 1 0 Default File is a discussion of the default Export Configuration File included in each WinREMS installation and the ASCII file it produces Sectio
152. een TRANSPORT COMMANDS The commands in these two boxes enable you to selectively exercise various functions of the Transport System Most of these commands are part of the normal reading or irradiating cycles To select a command click the command in the lower box that you wish to execute The command will appear in the top box To execute the command click the Execute Button or double click the command The commands in this box are intended to be self explanatory Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 8 8 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 8 0 8800 Host Reference cont d 8 1 View Screens cont d 8 1 4 Activity Log This feature is not operational in the current release of the 8800 Host 8 1 5 History Queue This screen displays a history of the operation of the Transport Subsystem as directed by the 8800 Host As the 8800 Host receives input from its own key board or from WinREMS it sends a high level Transport History command to the Transport Computer The Transport Computer breaks each of these commands down into lower level commands that direct the operation of the transport hard ware As each of these lower level commands is terminated either successfully or by an error condition a response 1s sent to the 8800 Host This screen displays these codes in either English Figure 8 7 or hexadecimal Figure 8 8 format The purpose of this screen is primarily diagnostic so that a service techni
153. el Control Cartridge to hold the cards to be read one Unload Cartridge to receive the cards successfully read and one Unload Cartridge to receive any cards with unreadable barcodes m Carrousel Load the cards into the Load Cartridge From the 8800 Host Main Menu select Control Carrousels This will bring the Carrousel Control Dialog Box Figure 3 2 into view Click on Both to indicate that you wish to move both Carrousels Click on 1 to move the No 1 Cartridge Slot to the load position Open both doors insert the loaded Cartridge in the Number 1 slot in the right or Load Carrousel Insert an empty Unload Cartridge in the Number 1 slot in the left or Unload Carrousel On the Carrousel Control Dialog Box click on Unload and click on 8 to move the Number 8 slot to the load position Insert an empty Unload Cartridge in the Number 8 slot in the Unload Carrousel Close the Access Doors Move Cartridge to Home 7 r Move by One fe Losers Unload Home Position 4 ADVANCE 7 Load Home Position 1 EE Figure 3 2 Carrousel Control Dialog Box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 3 6 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 3 0 General Instructions cont d 3 4 TLD Handling cont d 3 4 1 Cards cont d Unloading Dosimeters 1 From the 8800 Host Main Menu select Control Carrousels This will bring the Carrousel Control Dia
154. elp system for this dialog box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 45 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 7 QC 7 7 1 Electronics QC Electronics QC is an operator initiated procedure that monitors certain critical elements of the photronics subsystems The Electronics QC verifies the performance of the photo electronics photronics relative to limits specified by the user This process is performed by the Photronics firmware in the Reader Table 7 3 shows the functions of Electronics QC The nominal values and tolerances are user selectable as described in Section 7 7 1 2 Setup The values in this table are for examples only E Data Acquisition Date 0671 5 00 Photronics Version RAM Test PROM Test 15 Volt Supply Test 15 Volt Supply Test D A Reference Test HE 213 a Ng 5 x wo a o o Ng o N N 3 oa o o Temperature High Voltage 15 Volt Supply 15 Volt Supply D A Reference Ground Light Readings N N wm a o o o o Q EN EN Tes bead 2 0 1 to co sa N to oj eoej o ojl ojlo S oj oy wo S gt 5 if af y Eyed NG S a S mi Nf o co w wo o o o o o co S w o g o al oO oj of s armi ED A NO oro als g o MIE S S ofj m bai 2 HE HE Noise Readings x Ko a TD 2 a uu EA ao o o o o EEI o oj oj oj ojl s e oj Si ato S gt
155. enu select Read Acquisition Setup to bring the Acquisition Setup Dialog Box in to view Figure 7 23 Set the parameters in this box to the conditions in Table 6 3 Set Read Dosimeter Dialog Box From the WinREMS Main Menu select Read Start to bring up the Read Dosimeters Dialog Box Figure 7 21 Enter a unique Group ID Name Model 8800 Automatic TLD Reader with WinREMS Page 6 8 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 6 0 Calibration Procedures cont d 6 2 Dosimeter Cards cont d 6 2 3 Calibrate Reader cont d In the TTP Field select the TTP Title that you established in Step 4 In the Acquisition Setup Field select the Acquisition Setup that you established in Step 5 You may click on the Comment Button to add any comment you wish Read Dosimeters Click on the Start button The Reader will begin to read the dosimeters Close File and Exit When the Reader has completed reading all the dosimeters click on the Cancel Button to close the dialog box Select Calibration Records From the Main Menu select Search Response Records to bring up the Search Response Database Dialog Box Figure 7 8 Enter the Group ID created 10 in Step 6 and select the following entries in the designated fields Field Entry Dosimeter Type All Acquisition Mode All TL Response Any Element Display as Standard Report Standard Reports Computed Exposure Click on the OK Button This will bring al
156. er of two thicknesses TLD 700 015 releases the latch and opens the oain THK ABS holder 242 m cm2 ABS The Automatic Holder Opener AA ENTON is a small rectangular bench top instrument The operator simply inserts the latch end of the holder into an opening on the front The DISCRIMINATION TED 700 kata y opener senses the presence of the holder and moves a plunger into place which exerts pressure on the latch to open the holder The TL card drops into a chute for the operator to retrieve DEEP DOSE TLD 700 006 OPEN WINDOW 10915 THK MYLAR mg cm TOTAL PANG OW DOSE mg cm 2 PENS OF EYE Figure 1 6 Type 8814 Whole Body Dosimeter Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 1 6 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 1 0 Introduction cont d 1 5 Dosimeters cont d 1 5 1 Whole Body and Environmental Dosimeters cont d 0 15 mm 0 006 or 0 38 mm 0 015 and one from TLD 600 0 38 mm 0 015 thick Each chip filter combination performs a specific function as follows One TLD 700 chip 0 38 mm thick covered with 242 mg cm ABS plastic and 91 mg cm copper filtration is used for low energy photon discrimination and dose to the lens of the eye measurement Another TLD 700 chip 0 38 mm thick with 1000 mg cm combined PTFE ABS filtration 107 mg cm ABS 893 mg cm PTFE filters measures the deep dose A thinner TLD 700 chip 0 15 mm thick with 0 06 mm
157. erator s Manual 5 0 Quality Assurance cont d 5 2 Online QC Tests There are several automatic procedures available in WinREMS to enable you to confirm that the Reader is operating consistently The settings for these features are all established on the Acquisition Setup Dialog Box Figure 7 23 In each case you will set a frequency of reading expressed as an interval between readings and an allowable range If any reported value is outside of its acceptable range the Reader will stop before the next reading begins Procedural instructions for editing this screen are given in Section 4 2 2 Acquisition Setup 5 2 1 PMT Noise PMT Noise readings measure the electronic background noise in the system This noise comes from light leaks contamination and PMT dark current When this reading is taken the gas is flowing but is not heated and there is no dosimeter under the PMT The reading is taken for 10 seconds In addition to the frequency established in the Interval Field PMT Noise Readings are taken at the beginning of each group of dosimeters PMT Readings are reported in picocoulombs and generally should not exceed 1200 This value is the equivalent of a 3 mR exposure to a standard LiF chip 1 8 square by 0 015 thick PMT Readings are recorded in the current Group File and in the PMT Noise Database 5 2 2 Reference Light Reference Light readings measure the light output from four CaF scintillation crystals doped
158. erting up to two of them into a carrier Figure 1 10 that has the same general configuration as a whole body dosimeter The Reader then can read the Chipstrates and the IDs of the Chipstrates and carrier WinREMS automatically associates the exposure from each Chipstrate with its ID Chipstrates The TL chips used in the extremity dosimeters are the same as those used in the whole body dosimeters This enables X ray Beta or neutron measurement Up to two Chipstrates can be used in one pouch to obtain multiple types of radiation measurement A proprietary bonding method is used to attach the chips to the substrate Samples have been tested for 500 reuses at 400 C to assure full integrity of the bonding process The bare LiF chip was also exposed to numerous corrosive chemicals with no adverse effect The bonding process eliminates the need for Teflon encapsulation which provides the following benefits Reduction of photo luminescence and lower minimum detectable dose e Reduction of residual signal to less than 0 2 of the original exposure without special annealing e Measurement of neutron doses with higher temperature energy traps than allowed by 300 C e Use of stable high sensitivity TLD materials such as CaF Mn which has glow peaks near 300 C for environmental dosimetry Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 1 8 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 1 0 Introduction cont d 1 5 D
159. es for each position on the card the low and high ends of the acceptable range These fields set the limits for acceptable QC Readings If any QC Readings fall out side these limits the Reader will sound an audible alarm and stop taking readings The response record will be flagged with an o Note that if the Interval is set to 0 and the Reader encounters a QC Dosimeter it will read the dosimeter and respond in the same way as it would with a non zero setting in the Interval Field Blank Dosimeter Blank Dosimeters are an integral part of the dosimetry QC program They are dosimeters that have been calibrated and designated in the ECC Database as Blank Dosimeters They are used unexposed and inserted at regular intervals throughout a group of dosimeters being read in any Acquisition Mode Blank dosimeters are automatically read with the TTP to which they were calibrated and the reading is reported in the RCF units of the TTP If the reading on a Blank Dosimeters is outside the expected range the Reader will sound an audible warning and stop taking readings The response record will be flagged with an o Interval This field defines the frequency with which the Reader Expects to find a Blank Dosimeter If it does not find a Blank Dosimeter after reading the number of Dosimeters entered in this field it will sound an audible alarm and stop taking readings Range There are two boxes for each Card Position the
160. f a small subset of this population that is used only for calibration purposes Calibration Dosimeters When the ECC is applied to the response of each of the Field or the Calibration Dosimeters its TL efficiency is virtually identical to the mean value of the Calibration Dosimeters group and as a result all the TL dosimeters ideally have the same TL efficiency Let the TL Response TLR of a specific TL dosimeter be defined as the measured quantity that results from subjecting the dosimeter to one unit of a given ionizing radiation The terms dose exposure and dose equivalent are intentionally not used for reasons that will become clear later in this section The unit in which the measured quantity is expressed depends on the means that are used to detect the emitted TL photons If we could count every single photon emitted by the TLD and express the units of the ionizing radiation in terms of dose the TL Response would be equal to the TL efficiency Normally such a relationship is not the case the measured quantity is usually expressed in units of charge The TL response of the dosimeter is in general proportional to the TL efficiency 1 e TLR kxTLE 1 when k is the proportionality constant Assume now that all the Calibration Dosimeters are subjected to a quantity L of ionizing radiation from a given source where L can be expressed in any convenient unit for example time of irradiation This requires that for
161. from the Unload Cartridge 2 Reloaded into the Load Cartridge exposed then removed from the Unload Cartridge 3 Reloaded into the Load Cartridge read then removed from the Unload Cartridge Steps for Running Auto Calibration Refer to section 8 4 2 4 for steps on how to run the Auto calibration option The fields on the Auto Calibration dialog box Figure 8 25 are described below Disable Mode Enable Mode These two radio buttons determine whether the Auto Calibration dialog box is enabled or disabled The Enable Mode option must be selected to use the Auto Calibration feature If the Disable Mode option is selected then this feature cannot be used and the Calibration Dosimeters are read only once in the mode displayed in the Acquisition Mode field on the WinREMS Acquisition Setup dialog box Figure 7 23 Acquisition Mode The Acquisition Modes that are selected enabled on the Auto Calibration dialog box determine the types of readings that can be executed However to be executed the selected Acquisition Mode must match the Acquisition Mode field on the WinREMS Acquisition Setup dialog box Figure 7 23 In the Auto Calibration dialog box all the Acquisition Modes that you expect to use can be selected and left on Any Acquisition Mode that is not selected is considered disabled If none of these Acquisition Modes are selected then the Calibration Dosimeters are read once in the mode displa
162. g boxes overlaid on one of these screens These five views are all selected from the View option on the Main Menu Each of these views is discussed in one of the following subsections This menu also is used to select the print functions and print setup This feature is described in Sections 8 1 6 Print Functions 8 1 1 Glow Curve Select View Glow Curve to bring the Glow Curve View to the screen Figure 8 4 This view displays glow curve data as it is being generated and is the view that you will generally have on the screen as you are reading dosimeters It simultaneously displays the TL intensity in nanoamperes and hot gas temperature C as a function of time as measured by progress through the 200 channels of data in a glow curve in graphical form for all four TL positions Because of the wide range of possible readings more than seven decades the same vertical scale cannot be used for all TL readings As data is received it is displayed at the same scale as the previous reading This may cause the glow curve to flood the screen or it may appear to be a nearly flat line at the bottom of the screen depending on the intensity of the previous reading When the reading is completed the data will be re scaled to show the complete glow curve just filling the screen The Intensity scale at the left side of the curve adjusts accordingly Glow Curve View Model 8800 Menem Control Expose Options H v Glow Curve Expose L
163. g subsection of the File Menu Section 7 1 File Cancel will close the dialog box without selecting any records Help will activate the WinREMS Help System for this dialog box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 17 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 3 Search cont d 7 3 3 Log Database cont d The columns on this report are defined as follows Date This column displays the date and time that the message was generated You may change the format of these two columns by using the Windows operating system Click on Start Settings Control Panel Regional Settings and then the Date and Time Tabs Instrument ID This column displays the Identification of the Instrument being used when the Message was generated Group Id This column displays the identification of the Group that was being read when the Message was generated Message Type This column displays the type of message generated This is the same information as in the Message Type Field on the Search Log Database Dialog Box Figure 7 15 You may highlight a subset of the records for further processing such as printing or exporting Highlighting records is done in the same way as most Windows programs by clicking on the record you wish to highlight In this screen however the mouse pointer must be in the extreme left gray column To highlight one record click on the desired line in t
164. g TLD Cards is to ensure that all cards in a system gives virtually the same response to a given radiation exposure Because of natural variations in TL material responsiveness and in the physical mass of manufactured TL chips there is a variation in response of as much as 30 based on 3 sigma from the mean in a population of dosimeters The calibration factor for dosimeters is called the Element Correction Coefficient or ECC The ECC is used as a multiplier with the Reader output in nanoCoulombs to make the response of each dosimeter comparable to the average response of a designated group of dosimeters maintained as calibration dosimeters The purpose for Reader calibration is to maintain a consistent output from the Reader over a period of time based on a convenient local source Such a source might be a Sr source built into the Reader or a Cs source in a Harshaw Model 6610 Irradiator By using a set of Calibration Dosimeters and a consistent local source the Reader s performance may be kept at a constant level in spite of high voltage changes repairs dirt accumulation or long term drift The calibration factor for Readers is known as the Reader Calibration Factor or RCF This factor converts the raw charge data from the Photomultiplier Tubes in nanocoulombs to dosimetric units rems for example or to generic units gU for input to an algorithm The two factors are applied according to the following formula ECC x
165. g techs 7 5 7 7 Search Menu 142m 2 pda AG NANA NAA KANA a Ka 7 6 7 8 Search Response Database Dialog Box 7 6 7 9 Response Record Glow Curve View 7 9 7 10 Adjustable ROI View 2 2 20 7 10 7 11 Response Records Computed Exposure View 7 11 7 12 Response Record Region of Interest View 7 13 7 13 Search ECC Database Dialog Box 7 14 7 14 ECC Database Display oooooooooo o 7 15 7 15 Search Log Database Dialog Box 7 16 7 16 Log Database View Screen 0 4 7 17 Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 0 9 Operator s Manual Figure 7 17 7 18 7 19 7 20 7 21 7 22 7 23 7 24 7 25 7 26 LI 7 28 7 29 7 30 7 31 7 32 7 33 7 34 7 35 7 36 7 37 7 38 7 39 7 40 7 41 7 42 7 43 7 44 7 45 7 46 7 47 7 48 7 49 150 7 51 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 ILLUSTRATIONS cont d Page Electronics QC Database Dialog Box 7 18 Electronics QC Database View Screen 7 19 View MEn 25 25 4 naa ae Rea ae eres Cae ae 7 20 Read Menu MA dd e ORO mara 7 21 Read Dosimeters Dialog Box 7 21 Add Comment Dialog Box 7 22 Acquisition Setup Dialog Box 7 23 Typical Time Temperature Profile 7 29 Time Temperature Profile Setup Dialog Box 7 30 TLD Card Showing Chip Positions 7 31 Calibration Menu
166. g the optional radioactive source used to irradiate cards This shutter is spring loaded to the closed position In normal operation this status box should always display Closed If the optional Irradiator is not installed this field will always display N A Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 8 7 Operator s Manual 8 0 8800 Host Reference cont d 8 1 View Screens cont d 8 1 3 Transport Maintenance cont d WARNING IF YOUR READER HAS THE OPTIONAL IRRADIATOR AND THE SHUTTER FIELD EVER READS OPEN OR BETWEEN WHEN YOU ARE NOT ACTIVELY IRRADIATING CARDS STOP ALL OPERATIONS AND NOTIFY YOUR RADIATION SAFETY OFFICER THERE IS THE POSSIBIL ITY THAT THE SHUTTER IS STUCK IN AN OPEN POSITION THE SOURCE IS STILL SHIELDED IN ALL DIREC TIONS WHETHER THE SHUTTER IS OPEN OR CLOSED AS LONG AS THE IRRADIATOR IS MOUNTED TO THE INSTRUMENT IF HOWEVER THE IRRADIATOR IS REMOVED FOR SERVICE WITH THE SHUTTER OPEN A BEAM PATH IS AVAILABLE UPS The active Field in this box indicates whether the UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply is actively supplying power No indicates that power is coming from the line Yes indicates that there has been a power failure and the UPS is supplying the operating power for the Reader When this condition occurs the Reader will shut down at the completion of the current read cycle BAR CODES The five fields in this box all displa
167. ge 3 7 Operator s Manual 3 0 General Instructions cont d 3 4 TLD Handling cont d 3 4 2 DXT RAD Ringlets To prepare Ringlets for reading you must first remove them from their rings Figure 3 3 You may do this using the right side of the Ringlet Assembly Fixture Figure 3 4 Place the ring in the fixture as shown and pull the lever down The Ringlet will drop down the chute To insert the Ringlets into a Carrier Card place the card in the center of the fixture as shown Pull the slide under the card forward This will raise four tapered pins to spread apart the tangs that retain the Ringlet in the Carrier Card Place the Ringlets in the recesses in the Carrier Card NOTE Handle the Ringlets only with vacuum tweezers to avoid damaging either the TL Chip or the barcode When all four recesses are filled push the slide to the rear to disengage the tapered pins You may now remove the Carrier Card Figure 3 5 and place it in a Cartridge for reading Figure 3 4 Ringlet Assembly Disassembly Fixture Figure 3 3 DXT RAD Extremity Dosimeter Figure 3 5 Ringlet Carrier Card Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 3 8 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 3 0 General Instructions cont d 3 4 TLD Handling cont d 3 4 3 EXT RAD Chipstrates To read Chipstrates you must first cutthe Chipstrates out of their vinyl pouches Figure 3 6 You may then insert them in the Carrier Cards Figu
168. ger d 6 200 CAL REGION LOWER LIMIT Calibration Region Upper Limit TTP Signed decimal integer d 1 CAL REGION UPPER LIMIT Calibration Region Lower Limit TTP Signed decimal integer d 200 ECC_VALUE Element Correction Coefficient ECC File Floating point decimal Yof 0 893664 ELEMENT ENABLED Element is enabled TTP Setup Dialog Box integer d ELEMENT FLAGS see Note 6 Reader Long decimal integer ld 1 ELEMENT_POSITION Element Position on Substrate Reader dependent Signed decimal integer d 1 or Carrier Card 3500 amp 5500 always 1 4500 6600 amp 8800 may be 1 4 GAS_FLOW Gas Flow 0 on 1 off Reader Signed decimal integer d 0 GLOW CURVE Value of each of 200 points of Reader Long decimal integer ld 64 84 124 glow curve data GLOW_CURVE_MAX Value of highest reading on long decimal integer 3427 glow curve Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W O 0802 Page A 22 Appendix B ASCII Export File A Dia Default HEAT CURVE Temperature of each of 200 Reader Signed decimal integer d 50 55 61 300 points of glow curve data HEATING_RATE Rate of change of temperature TTP Signed decimal integer d 8 during acquisition HIGH_VOLTAGE High Voltage Reader Signed decimal integer d 875 MAX TEMP Maximum temperature during TTP Signed decimal integer d 300 acquisition PREHEAT_TEMP Preheat temperature TTP Signed decimal integer d 50 PREHEAT_TIME Preheat time
169. hange a calibrated TTP to uncalibrated subject to the action of the OK and Cancel buttons Maximum Temp These fields define the peak temperature attained during the Acquire time In the standard Reader this temperature is limited to 300 C An option is available that will enable heating to 400 C for use with Teflon based cards and extremity dosimeters In operation the instrument heats to the maximum temperature at the specified rate and holds that temperature until the acquisition time is complete Changing the Maximum temperature will change a calibrated TTP to uncalibrated subject to the action of the OK and Cancel Buttons NOTE TLD Cards with Teflon encapsulated chips should not be heated above 300 C Only Kapton based cards and Chipstrates can be heated above 300 C Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 33 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 5 Read cont d 7 5 3 TTP Setup cont d Acquire time These fields define the time in seconds during which the instrument collects the 200 readings of the glow curve It includes the time the instrument is heating from Preheat temperature to Maximum temperature and any time the temperature is at its maximum value Acquire time is forced to a multiple of 3 1 3 seconds and can be no less than 10 seconds Changing the Acquire time will change a calibrated TTP to uncalibrated subject to the action of the C
170. haracters are not printed Id Long Same options as d Same options as Same options as The long spec decimal d d allows numbers up integer to 2 147 483 647 d d d d Notes 1 In the interest of space less commonly used formatting options have not been presented in this table 2 Width and precision options are typically used together to specify minimum and or maximum number of characters in the variable being sent to a file or printer Table 3 Format Codes For Variable Types Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page A 14 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual Appendix B ASCII Export File 2 0 Customizing The Export File Format cont d 2 2 Output Format Specification cont d Spec Description A Full name of day Hb Abbreviation of month B Full name of month Day of the month Numeric month of year Full number of year y Year of century 00 Lex Date Table 4 Date Specification Options spec _ Description hour of 24 hour clock hour of 12 hour clock AM PM abbreviation AM Minutes past the hour Seconds past the minute 15 Time 24 hour clock 14 55 15 Dec 02 14 55 15 1993 Date and time 24 hour clock Table 5 Time Specification Options Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page A 15 Operator s Manual Appendix B ASCII Export File 3 0 Tutorial 3 1 Modifying the Configuration File
171. he TO TLD REMS elements are heated by a micro processor based hot gas system which generates a precisely controlled time temperature profile Heat can be applied simultaneously to up to four dosimeter elements of a card without physical contact between the heater and the element The Photomultiplier Tube PMT converts the emitted light to electrical signals that are transmitted to a micro processor based data acquisition system The transport mechanism then moves the card to the left or unload carrousel If the Reader can not interpret the Card ID on its initial attempt it automatically makes two more attempts If it still fails the operator is prompted to either enter an identification number or allow the card to be rejected by default which will happen if no operator is present Unprocessed cards are directed to cartridge eight on the unload carrousel protecting against data loss from reading the card dose without adequate identification This requires that cartridge eight of the load carrousel not be used for processed cards hence the 1400 card capacity VIDEO HOST COMPUTER TERMINAL n TRANSFORT COMPUTER PHOTRONICS A COMPUTER HOTRONICS D PHOTRONICS B COMPU COMPUTER PHOTRONICS C TER COMPUTER LA PMT ASSY LEFT RIGHT RACK DOSIMETER CARROUSEL CARROUSEL DRIV
172. he gray column To highlight a number of contiguous records click on the first record and lt Shift gt click on the last of the desired records To highlight multiple non contiguous records lt Ctl gt click on each of the desired records You may highlight all records by clicking in the gray box immediately to the left of the Date Column heading You may print or export all the selected records or a highlighted subset of the records by following the instructions in the corresponding subsection of the File Menu Section 7 1 File E Log Records 1 Log Records Date InstrumentID Group ID Message Type Message 08 30 99 04 16 55 ExportTest Comment End of File 08 27 99 02 57 12 Read Comment End of File 08 27 99 02 48 30 CalDos Comment End of File 08 27 99 02 38 24 Read Dosimeter Rejected Rejecting dosimeter 201 ECC not available 08 27 99 02 22 46 CalDos Comment End of File Figure 7 16 Log Database View Screen Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 18 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 3 Search cont d 7 3 4 Electronics QC Database The Electronics QC Quality Control Database contains a record for each time the Electronics QC test was performed See Section 7 7 1 Electronics QC for a detailed description of the data and Section 5 1 4 Electronics QC for
173. ialog Box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 62 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual BLANK PAGE Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 8 1 Operator s Manual 8 0 8800 Host Reference This chapter describes in detail the operation and features of the 8800 Host Computer of the Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader This software resides on the Host Computer built into the Model 8800 Reader The keyboard and display for this computer are mounted on top of the Reader This system generally controls the mechanical operation ofthe Reader It is used for loading and unloading dosimeters from the Reader irradiating cards monitoring TL data as it is generated and for maintenance When the system is reading dosimeters or performing related dosimetry operations the 8800 Host Computer is controlled by the WinREMS software located on a PC connected to the Reader WinREMS is also used for all dosimetric data handling storage and reporting Detailed information about the WinREMS system is provided in Section 7 0 WinREMS Reference Glow Curve View Model 8800 View Control Expose Options Help The 8800 Host Computer is based on Windows NT Version 4 0 and operates in the same manner as the Windows NT and Windows 95 PC operating systems The first three bars at the top of the screen Figure 8 1 contain system information that is similar for all screens The first bar displays
174. ie sl of dose equivalence The Holder protects the card from Figure 1 4 Dosimeter Holder Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 1 5 Operator s Manual 1 0 Introduction cont d 1 5 Dosimeters cont d 1 5 1 Whole Body and Environmental Dosimeters cont d plastic and is gasketted and sealed to retain the card in a light and moisture excluding environment The design is tamper resistant and tamper evident yet is opened quickly and easily by means of a manual Holder Opener or by an Automatic Holder Opener The front and back halves may be either hinged or hooked together The card cavity contains an orientation notch so that a card cannot be inserted incorrectly Body attachment can be by belt loop or by clip and it can be worn as part of a typical Employee Identification Badge Holders may be color coded by means of an optional silk screen process in one area ten colors are available The Manual Holder Opener Figure 1 5 is a small hand held device which the operator inserts into the open end of the holder and with mild thumb pressure on the button HOLDER Figure 1 5 Holder Opener Whole Body Card A typical Whole Body Card Figure 1 6 consists of four LiF TL chips 3 mm 1 8 inch square encapsulated between two sheets of Teflon 0 0025 inches 10 mg cm thick and mounted on an aluminum substrate Three of the chips are fabricated from TLD 700 in eith
175. igned decimal integer d 200 Notes 4 The format for this field is HEAT CURVE format string element 1 200 5 The format for this field is GLOW_CURVE format string element 1 200 6 The following flags are available a bit set in a long word will indicate the flag is true 0x00000001 element enabled 0x00000010 reread limit exceeded 0x00000020 halt limit exceeded 0x00000040 mark limit exceeded 0x00000080 reading out of range 0x00000100 quality factor applied 0x00000200 background factor applied 0x00000400 rcf applied 0x00000800 ecc applied 0x00001000 high gain set 0x00002000 low gain set 0x00010000 reread times exceeded Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page A 24 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual Appendix B ASCII Export File BLANK PAGE Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page A 25 Operator s Manual Appendix C CFR 31 5 31 5 Certain measuring gauging or controlling devices a A general license is hereby issued to commercial and industrial firms and research educational and medical institutions individuals in the conduct of their business and Federal State or local government agencies to acquire receive possess use or transfer in accordance with the provisions of paragraphs b c and d of this section byproduct material contained in devices designed and manufactured for the purpose of detecting measuring
176. ile Section 7 1 3 Export Each record in the 3500 and 5500 Readers exported file will contain selected information from one TLD Response Database Record 1 1 Models 3500 and 5500 The specific content of the exported file is defined by a configuration file named TLDEXPT CFG The default version of this file is shown in Figure 1 A sample file based on the default format is shown in Figure 2 the fields are described in more detail in Table 1 Fields in the export file are separated by a comma and a blank records are separated by a carriage return CR 92080501 9208050 9208050 9208050 9208050 9208050 9208050 PMT Noise 9920805 102958 Test Light 9920805 103018 di c16 9920805 103043 Uda EC 9920805 103107 di c18 9920805 103131 dl c19 9920805 103155 di c20 9920805 103220 a e21 9920805 103244 di C22 9920805 103309 Al 623 9920805 103333 PMT Noise 9920805 103508 Test Light 9920805 103529 9208050 9208050 9208050 9208050 9208050 oooooooooooo oooooooooooo HHHHHHHHHHHYH Figure2 Default ASCII Export File 3500 and 5500 Readers Page A 6 Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual Appendix B ASCII Export File 1 0 Default File cont d 1 1 Models 3500 and 5500 cont d Table 1 Field Field Label Pos Instrument Type Group ID Dosimeter ID Reading Date Reading Time TTP Num
177. ing certain preventive maintenance procedures Complete diagnostic and repair procedures are described in the Model 8800 Service Manual Publication No 8800 P S If you do not have a Service Manual or a qualified technician is not available call the Thermo Electron Corp RM amp P Technical Service Department 800 435 5656 or 440 248 7400 or send a fax 440 349 6581 for assistance To expedite technical assistance please fill out the Troubleshooting Documentation form in Appendix B NOTE To avoid invalidation of your warranty read the Thermo Electron Corp RM amp P warranty statement before attempting any repairs 5 1 Daily QA In the absence of abnormal operations few diagnostic checks are required to verify proper operation To insure however that accurate results are being recorded we recommend some routine checks You should perform these checks daily either at the start of operations or if operating on a 24 hour schedule then at a specified time each day 5 1 1 Record Retention There are two types of records to be maintained initial records of the performance of the instrument in the form of detailed and quantitative analyses of the glow curve data from the Calibration Dosimeters and daily recordings of the various instrument readings the Daily Control Chart The former provides a baseline for absolute confirmation of the performance of the instrument over a long period of time the latter detects shorter te
178. ing your Reader and dosimeters If you are setting up your system for the first time it is important that you follow these directions carefully and in the sequence they are given After your system is fully operational you may use certain of these procedures without the others Section 6 2 1 Prepare Dosimeters describes the preparation necessary for any of the following calibration procedures Section 6 2 2 Generate Calibration Dosimeters describes the creation of a group of Calibration Cards usually 1 2 of the dosimeter population to be used for calibrating the Reader This procedure establishes the Element Correction Coefficients ECC of these cards without reference to a calibrated Reader Section 6 2 3 Calibrate Reader describes the use of the Calibration Cards to establish the Reader Calibration Factor RCF for each Time Temperature Profile TTP You will also use this procedure on a regular basis as a part of your quality control procedures as described in Section 5 1 3 Reader Calibration Factor Section 6 2 4 Calibrate Dosimeters describes the procedure for generating the ECCs for Whole Body and Environmental Field Cards QC Cards and Blank Cards You will use this procedure to calibrate dosimeters added to your system and to recalibrate existing dosimeters The same procedures are described for Extremity Dosimeters in Sections 6 3 1 Prepare Dosimeters 6 3 2 Generate Extremity Dosimeters 6 3 3 Calibrate Reader and
179. ips mounted between two PTFE sheets or mounted on KaptonS on an aluminum substrate identified by a peelable label with an ID Number appearing in both numeric and barcode formats One corner of the card is notched to insure proper insertion into the holder and correct orientation when being read in the Card Reader The aluminum substrate may be color anodized for identification A typical card is shown in Figure 1 3 While the basic Dosimeter Assembly design is standardized the filtration media and thickness and the TL chips can be specifically selected from a variety of materials to provide measurement of a wide range of radiation types and energies The readings can then be processed by a Dose computation algorithm for an accurate measurement Ourable aluminum card substrate Notched identification corner Bar code identification Thermoluminescent elements Teflon sheets Figure 1 3 Typical Dosimeter Card environmental damage and retains the filtration media which attenuate the various radiation types to provide selective entrapment in the TL material This difference in radiation absorption allows determination of shallow deep and lens of the eye doses as well as some energy discrimination The TLD Card Holder Figure 1 4 is made of durable tissue equivalent ABS O RING SEAL GROOVE amp oS BARCODE WINDOW gt lt ORIENTATION KEY OPENER SLOT REAR SNAP CLOSED EF INSERT CARD ENGAGE ine
180. is in the between position When the Start Button is activated the software first checks to confirm that the Shutter is in the closed position If it is not an error box is displayed to notify the operator of the error and the process will be terminated If the Shutter is in the closed position the Expose process will be initiated When the first card is moved into the Expose Position the shutter is opened and the message Card is Being Exposed is displayed When the exposure period is completed the shutter is closed the Status Message field is cleared and the card is placed in the Unload Cartridge The process then repeats until the Load Cartridge is empty or the required number of cards has been exposed At this time the message Process Complete is displayed The operator can stop the process at any time by clicking on the Stop Exposure Button The Reader will complete the cur rent cycle and stop The message Commanding Instrument to Stop Exposing will be displayed on the message line after the Card is Being Exposed message disappears If after clicking on the Stop Reading button the operator wishes to restart exposing cards he can click the Start Button The message Commanding Instrument to Continue Exposing will be displayed until the message Card is Being Exposed reappears Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 8 17 Operator s Manual 8 0 8800 H
181. ith an r and if the limit on the number of re reads is reached the last re read is flagged with a t Mark with warning flag sets a level which if exceeded will flag the record with an m on the database so that it may be recalled for further analysis The Reader will continue to take Readings after this alarm is triggered Accept and Exit Click on OK to accept the values you have entered At any time before exiting from this dialog box you may remove all changes made during the current editing session by clicking on the Cancel Button Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 4 6 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 4 0 Tutorial cont d 4 2 Data Acquisition cont d 4 2 3 Read Dosimeters cont d 4 2 3 Read Dosimeters This section describes the procedure for reading TLD Cards The process for reading Chipstrates is similar except that only two channels may be active on the TTP Where the procedures are different the differences will be noted 1 Set Reader On the 8800 Host Screen select View Glow Curves to allow the WinREMS PC to control the Reader 2 Load Dosimeters Load the TLD Cards into the Reader according to the instructions in 3 4 TLD Handling For Extremity Dosimeters first load the dosimeters into Carrier Cards then load the cards into the Reader 3 Access Read Dosimeters Dialog Box From the WinREMS Main Menu select Read Start or click on the GO Button
182. iting from WinREMS 3 1 5 Expose Dosimeters Tutorial 4 1 EXT RAD Extremity Dosimetry System Description o oooooooo 1 5 2 Dosimeters see Chipstrates Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 9 2 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 9 0 Index cont d Subject Section General Instructions 3 0 Generate Calibration Dosimeters Procedure 6 2 2 6 3 2 Reference xang seh haa a 7 6 1 Host Computer 8800 General Instructions 3 3 Introduction 2 05 1 3 Reference 0 ana Pania 8 0 Initiating WinREMS 3 1 4 Irradiator Sr internal Description 1 1 Main Menu 8800 Host oo ooooo o Figure 8 1 WinREMS 04 Figure 7 2 Multiple Dosimeter Type Systems 6 1 2 Nitrogen Requirements 2 1 1 NRC Requirements Complete Appendix C Summary an Page 0 1 Online QC Tests oo ooooooomooo 5 2 PC Requirements 00 00 0 ee 2 3 Performance Specifications Dosimetric 02 00 eee ee 1 7 Reader kn nata Nasaan Gate abaw 1 6 PMT Cooler Daly ODA Basay AA habe aes 5 1 2 PMT Noise GA AA 5 2 1 Preventive Maintenance see Scheduled Maintenance QA Procedures Daily QA nr eee a GAGA 5 1 QC Cards Online QC Tests 5 2 4 Password Pa eters gla ceed as tole 7 9 1 4 Initial dd
183. its files with other workspaces or it may keep all of its Files and databases separate From other workspaces Enter a name for the Workspace you are creating You may also edit the default path of your workspace if you wish Workspace File Name Location C PROGRAM FILES BICRON WINREMS Cancel amp Back Next gt Browse Finish Figure 7 3 Workspace Wizard Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 3 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 1 File cont d 7 1 2 Import cont d TLD REMS Group Files DAT Response Records imported from TLD NET REMS are added to the Response Record Database in the current WinREMS Workspace TLD REMS ECC Database ECCDB DAT ECC Records imported from TLD NET REMS are added to the ECC Database in the current WinREMS Workspace TLD REMS PMT Files PMTDB DAT PMT Records imported from TLD NET REMS are added to the Response Record Database in the current WinREMS Workspace Import Log Notepad File Edit Search Help Import Log for 11 21 66 61 65 PH Import Type TLD REMS TTP Files TLD REMS Reference Light Files RLDB DAT Reference Light Records imported from TLD NET REMS are added to the Response Record Database in the current WinREMS Workspace TLD REMS Log Files LOGDB DAT Log Records imported from TLD NET REMS are added to the Log Database in the current WinREMS Workspace TLD
184. l 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 8 14 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 8 0 8800 Host Reference cont d 8 3 Expose Function This Main Menu item Figure 8 17 is used to expose cards to a known amount of radiation so that they can be used for calibration purposes The radiation source is Sr and is approximately 0 5 millicuries in strength The primary purpose of this source is Reader and Dosimeter calibration CAUTION The Irradiator Assembly contains a radioactive source Do not tamper with the source For complete safety instructions see the Optional Sr 90 Irradiator for Models 6600 amp 8800 TLD Readers Irradiator Assembly Information and Installation Manual Publication No SR90 0 I 8 3 1 Initiate The Expose Initiate Dialog Box Figure 8 18 is used to set the amount of exposure that cards exposed to the Internal Irradiator will receive and to initiate the exposure process Exposure Mode Exposure Mode determines whether an entry is entered in the Time field or in the Value field when defining the exposure the dosimeters receive When one of these two options Value or Time is selected the selected field becomes highlighted indicating that it is now a data entry field and that an entry value is expected The field that is not selected Value or Time is grayed out This field then becomes a display field and is calculated automatically based on the calibration values and the d
185. l e wo Bim ojeSejesejs ololo S sia alala S So o o KI oO wo Sl ol a s g S oi Sj o Sj eSejeje js oloje olj j a co co Co D a Cancel Figure 5 1 Electronics QC Test Results Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 5 4 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 5 0 Quality Assurance cont d 5 1 Daily QA cont d 5 1 4 Electronics QC cont d 5 1 4 2 Test Analysis The top portion of the screen Figure 5 1 displays the results of a photronics self test which uses the Analog to Digital A D Converter and compares the results against internal firmware standards The four columns of data display the results of tests run on each chip position to check the ability of the Model 8800 to accurately read the four different chips on a card All rows and columns should read PASS A FAIL readout indicates an electronic board or assembly that needs to be checked further calibrated or replaced See the Model 8800 Technical Service Manual Publication 8800 W S for instructions on any replacements Specific indications of a FAIL reading are as follows RAM Test checks the random access memory on the Digital Photronics Board If any of the fields read FAIL the problem is in one or more of the RAM chips on the Photronics Digital Board of the Model 8800 Replace the chip s or the board itself PROM Test checks the read only memory of the Digi
186. l the capabilities of WinREMS 4 1 Expose TLDs This section describes the procedure for exposing TLD Chipstrates or Cards to the 8800 s optional Internal Sr Irradiator If your Reader does not have an Irradiator installed you may omit this section CAUTION This device contains a radioactive source Do not tamper with the source during normal operation Before starting this procedure be sure that you anneal the dosimeters read them once to eliminate any spurious TL signal This procedure is carried out entirely from the Instrument Control Panel Use of the PC and WinREMS is not required 1 Load Dosimeters Load the Dosimeters into the Reader following the instructions in Section 3 4 TLD Handling 2 Select Function From the Main Menu select View Glow Curves to bring the Glow Curve View to the screen From the Main Menu select Expose Initiate to bring the Expose Initiate Dialog Box Figure 4 1 into view 3 Select Exposure Mode Exposure Mode Value maang Value Bo gu Time 50 654519 seconds Cancel Card Id Figure 4 1 Expose Initiate Dialog Box Click on the Exposure Mode Field This field toggles between Value and Time as the primary means of setting the exposure For this example set this field to Value 4 Set Exposure Amount Click on the Value Field Enter an exposure amount for example 500 The Time Field will automatically change to reflect the time required to accomplish
187. l the records in the selected group into view Highlight all the records in the group Set Calibration Parameters From the Main Menu select Calibration Reader Calibration to bring up the Reader Calibration Dialog Box Figure 7 29 In the four Irradiation Fields enter the dose to which the Calibration Dosimeters were exposed in Step 1 In the TTP Title Field enter the Title of the TTP selected in Step 4 Table 6 3 Acquisition Setup Conditions for Calibrating the Reader Acquisition Mode Apply Calibration Employee ID Export Format PMT Noise Interval PMT Noise Range Ref Light Interval Ref Light Range QC Card Interval QC Card Range Blank Card Interval Blank Card Range Calibrate Reader Apply ECC Disabled None 1 10 to 2000 picoCoulombs 1 Varies with instrument 0 Not applicable 0 Not applicable Model 8800 Automatic TLD Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 6 9 Operator s Manual 6 0 Calibration Procedures cont d 6 2 Dosimeter Cards cont d 6 2 3 Calibrate Reader cont d In the units field enter the unit of measure for the Irradiation These units will then be applied to all future readings taken with this TTP when the RCF is applied 11 Calculate RCF Click on the Compute Button to calculate the RCFs For a detailed explanation of all the fields on this screen see Section 7 7 2 reader Calibration 12 Accept Results Click on the Accept Button to apply the RCFs t
188. lank Card Range Not applicable Model 8800 Automatic TLD Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 6 17 Operator s Manual 6 0 Calibration Procedures cont d 6 3 Extremity Dosimeters cont d 6 3 3 Calibrate Reader cont d In the Irradiation Field enter the dose to which the Calibration Dosimeters were exposed in Step 1 In the TTP Title Field enter the Title of the TTP selected in Step 4 In the units field enter the unit of measure for the Irradiation These units will then be applied to all future readings taken with this TTP when the RCF is applied 11 Calculate RCF Click on the Extremity Field to put a check Y in the box Click on the Compute Button to calculate the RCFs For a detailed explanation of all the fields on this screen see Section 7 6 2 reader Calibration 12 Accept Results Click on the Accept Button to apply the RCFs to the database If you do not want to accept the computed RCFs you may click on the Cancel Button 13 Remove Cards Remove the Cards from the Reader 6 3 4 Calibrate Dosimeters This section describes the procedure for generating the ECCs for Extremity Dosimeters from a calibrated TTP This procedure is the same whether the Ringlets are new or are being re calibrated as part of a regular QA program In the case of a re calibration the system will make the new ECC the current ECC You may also mix new and used dosimeters in the same batch the system will record both
189. lected in the Carrousel Box one position in the direction indicated Advance is defined as moving the next higher number Carrousel slot to the Home Position This mode is most useful if you are loading or unloading several Cartridges in succession Glow Curve View Model 8800 View Control Expose Options Help al Carousels Date Time Password Maintenance Retransmit Results Shutdown Update Software Figure 8 11 Control Menu Unload Home Position Load Home Position The numbers in the boxes adjacent to these labels indicate which cartridges are in the Home Position as indicated by the sensors Carrousel Control Move Cartridge to Home 0000 a D a os Unload Home Position 1 Load Home Position 1 m Carrousel 3 r Move by One Figure 8 12 Carrousel Control Dialog Box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 8 0 8800 Host Reference cont d 8 2 Control Functions cont d 8 2 2 Date Time Select Control Date Time to bring the Date Time Properties Dialog Box Figure 8 13 into view From this box you can adjust the date and time of the system To change the day of the month only simply click the desired date on the calendar To select a different month click the down arrow to the right of the months and select from the drop down list that appears below the month To change the year click the up or down arrows to
190. libration Dosimeters Reader Calibration Dosimeter Calibration MODO Figure 7 27 Calibration Menu instructions see Section 6 2 2 Generate Calibration Dosimeters The fields on this box operate as follows Dosimeter ID This column displays the Dosimeter ID for each of the dosimeters in the population ECC i ECC ii ECC iii ECC iv This column displays the ECC Element Correction Coefficient for each dosimeter The ECC is a measure of the TL sensitivity of each dosimeter relative to the average sensitivity of the dosimeters in the currently selected set of dosimeters All lines on which all the ECCs falls between the Upper and Lower Limits as defined at the bottom of the dialog box will appear highlighted in the upper portion of the dialog box Only these dosimeters were used in the computation of the mean values Reading Statistics The fields in this group box all relate to the TL readings of the Calibration dosimeters Total This field displays the total number of dosimeters highlighted on the Search Response Database Dialog Box Accepted This field displays the number of dosimeters that fell within the designated limits in the current calculation Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 37 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 6 Calibration cont d 7 6 1 Generate Cal Dosimeters cont d Rejected This field displays the number of
191. lick on the OK Button This will bring all the records in the selected group into view Highlight all the records in the group Acquisition Setup Conditions for Calibrating Cards Se aaa Acquisition Mode Apply Calibration Apply RCF Employee ID Disabled Export Format None PMT Noise Interval 10 PMT Noise Range Ref Light Interval 10 Ref Light Range QC Card Interval 0 QC Card Range Blank Card Interval 0 Blank Card Range Not applicable Not applicable Calibrate Dosimeters 10 to 2000 picoCoulombs Varies with instrument Model 8800 Automatic TLD Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 6 11 Operator s Manual 6 0 Calibration Procedures cont d 6 2 Dosimeter Cards cont d 6 2 4 Calibrate Dosimeters cont d 11 Get Calibration Dialog Box From the Main Menu select Calibration Dosimeter Calibration to bring the Dosimeter Calibration Dialog Box into view Figure 7 30 12 Set Calibration Parameters In the four Irradiation Fields enter the exposure used to irradiate the cards in Step 2 Click on the arrow in the Mark as Field and select Field Enter an acceptable ECC range for each chip position This value will determine the deviation from the mean 1 0 that will be considered acceptable for the Field Cards Enter it as the Upper and Lower Limits for each position for example 0 77 and 1 43 Cards which fall outside of this range will be flagged on the database as having an unaccep
192. line shows the peak current in nanoamps The three fields in the lower box to the left of each curve provide real time information about the status of the Reader The first line displays the status of the Reader with respect to the read cycle as defined in the TTP Typical values are Ready to begin a new cycle Preheat Reading and Anneal The second line shows the temperature of the gas at each nozzle of the read station in degrees centigrade The third line displays the high voltage at each PMT Below the glow curve boxes at the left side of the screen is the Cooler Temperature This field displays the temperature of the PMT Assembly in degrees centigrade This temperature should be stabilized in the range of 9 to 12 C before any readings are taken There is a Stop Operation control button in the bottom right corner of the screen Clicking on this button will stop the Reader at any time while it is reading cards The Reader will complete its current cycle and shut down in a controlled manner with no loss of data 5Sep 1997 15 56 15 14 140692 0000106 4773 mR 3 227 ROM 2 674 RDI2 120 7 ROI3 D S o e 2 Intensity nA 0 3094 RCF 34 n Cooling 160 C 865 y Channel 156 0 mA 0 8834 ROIT 0 8479 ROI2 40 71 ROIS 198 5 ROI4 ECC 0 3363 RCF 35 n Cooling 149 T 854 y Channel Intensity nA Cooler 9 C Reading Dosimeter 1137 mA 0
193. ll enter the ECCs in the ECC Database and flag the dosimeter records as Calibration Dosimeters Any rejected Dosimeters remain in the database as Dosimeters with bad ECCs which may later be calibrated to Field Dosimeters NOTE If you already have a set of Calibration Dosimeters in the ECC Database and Accept a new set in the same workspace there will be two or more sets with different mean values We recommend that you not have more than one set of Calibration Dosimeters unless they are in separate ECC Databases and used in different workspaces Close Clicking on this button will close the dialog box without saving any changes made after the last time the Accept Button was clicked Help Clicking on this button will activate the WinREMS Help system for this dialog box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 39 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 6 Calibration cont d 7 6 2 Reader Calibration This procedure is used to generate a set of Reader Correction Factors RCFs for one TTP on a given reader An RCF is the average response of the Reader to a subset of the Calibration Dosimeters expressed in dosimetric units The RCF converts the PMT output from nanocoulombs to the dosimetric unit selected by the operator Each calibrated TTP will have a unique RCF for each active chip position The Reader calibration procedure must be repeated for a TTP when any of the ti
194. log Box Figure 3 2 into view Click on Both to indicate that you wish to move both Carrousels Click on 1 to move the No 1 Cartridge Slot to the load position Open both doors remove the Unloaded Cartridge from the Number 1 slot in the left or Unload Carrousel On the Carrousel Control Dialog Box click on Unload and click on 8 to move the Number 8 Cartridge to the load position Check for any cards in the No 8 Cart ridge Any cards in this Cartridge were not read due to damaged barcodes Close the Access Doors Card ID Read Failure If a Card ID is not read satisfactorily on the first pass two additional attempts will be made to read the Card ID Number If it still fails the message START to accept STOP to reject will appear on the WinREMS message line You have three options at this point l Press lt Start gt to allow the process to continue without computer selected identification Press lt Stop gt to drop the card into the eject bin Press lt Enter gt to edit the Card ID An entry field will appear on the Reader s screen lt gt and lt gt will move the cursor from one digit position to another and lt i gt and lt l gt will change the numbers for the digit on which the cursor is located If none of these options is exercised within a brief time the card will automatically be rejected Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Pa
195. low and high ends of the acceptable range These fields set the limits for acceptable Blank Dosimeter Readings If any Blank Dosimeter Readings fall outside these limits the Reader will sound an audible alarm and stop taking readings Note that if the Interval is set to 0 and the Reader encounters a Blank Dosimeter it will read the dosimeter and respond in the same way as it would with a non zero setting in the Interval Field Limits If Reading Exceeds These three fields set warnings for different levels of high dosimeter readings halt instrument If any reading exceeds the number set in this box the Reader will stop taking readings and will sound an audible warning This immediately informs you that there has possibly been an emergency level exposure The Response Record will be flagged with an h mark with a warning flag If any reading exceeds the level set in this field the response record will be flagged with an m so that when the records are reviewed on the Search Response Database Screen this record will be evident The Reader continues to take readings Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 28 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 5 Read cont d 7 5 2 Acquisition Setup cont d reread same dosimeter upto___ times If any reading exceeds the level set in this field the Reader will read the dosimeter again and will continue to read th
196. lts Dialog Box Total This field displays the number of Readings Mean These fields display the mean value of the readings Standard Deviation These fields display the percent standard deviation of the Readings Reference Light Readings The fields in this group box all relate to the Reference Light Readings highlighted on the Search Results Dialog Box Total This field displays the number of Readings Mean These fields display the mean of the deviation of the readings Standard Deviation These fields display the percent standard deviation of the Readings Upper Limit Lower Limit These values represent the deviation from the mean of the population of dosimeters you are willing to accept For Field Dosimeters 30 is a commonly used value For Calibration Dosimeters you may wish to hold a tighter range for example 10 Because the ECC is applied as a multiplier according to the formula ECC charge Exposure RCF Upper and Lower Limits of 1 43 and 0 77 represent 30 and 1 11 and 0 91 represent 10 If you are not satisfied with the results of the computation you may change these limits and re compute as many times as you wish Compute Clicking on this button will recompute the ECCs for the currently highlighted set of records You may move to the selected records screen change the selection of highlighted records and re compute as often as you wish Accept Clicking on this button wi
197. lts Screen into view Figure 5 1 Take Readings Click on the Start Button on the floating dialog box to initiate a set of readings After the readings have been taken and the statistics computed the results will appear on the screen Any readings out of range will be noted by the appearance of HIGH or LOW next to the value that is out of range as shown in Figure 5 1 To analyze the results of any tests that failed see Section 5 1 4 2 Test Analysis To reset the parameters for the lower portion of the screen see Section 7 7 1 2 Setup ii Photronics Version RAM Test PROM Test 15 Volt Supply Test 15 Volt Supply Test D A Reference Test Time 10 02 42 Instrument ID M8800Pc i alo lo lols ales eS 21818 1138 ooo lo lo ala o ls ala 51S BS 13 Ng a o a lt Temperature ple lo o N j N Niu BE o o Q High Voltage o j N aje m j w x ello lis A PAE ate o als 5la 33 3 PG el Le Ni NG o N e 3 o go no t gj gt Flo co ollo ella N pan oo an a o o o o o o a a N 15 Volt Supply dan o co dan o o o oO 2s a on o D o o is a 28 15 Volt Supply D A Reference Ground Sl la Sy ala wl amp i o N o Fa Light Readings Noise Readings o NT a Electronics QC Sl la Sula E
198. me temperature or rate fields are changed for the preheat or acquire portions of the cycle Changes to the anneal portion of the cycle will not affect the calibration The Reader also must be calibrated after certain Reader Calibration 2 maintenance functions such as replacing the PMTs or adjusting the High Voltage A representative number of Calibration Dosimeters for example 10 is selected annealed and exposed to a known amount of radiation The dosimeters are then read with the Acquisition Mode on the Acquisition Setup Dialog Box Figure 7 23 set to Calibrate Reader Apply Calibration set to ECC only and using the TTP that is to be calibrated After the dosimeters have been read use the Search Response Database function to make records you just read the current set and highlight the records you wish to use Then select Calibration Reader Calibration to bring up the Reader Calibration Dialog Box Figure 7 29 For more detailed Procedures see Section 6 2 3 Calibrate Reader REF Results i Active 8675 81 25 3948 Pending 3720 81 56 3981 Percent Difference 4649 3784 4358 KI ii iii m Reading Statistics Total 5 Accepted E Mean Rejected fo Standard Deviation 1944 1631 ras 8 199 5270 8773 fi 039 m PMT Noise Readings Total 2 Mean 0380 0277 0433 0405 Standard Deviation 5 341 fi 750 65 43 21 79 Reference Light Readings Total
199. meter was last calibrated O if no ECC was applied ECC_DATE Time Dosimeter was last calibrated O if no ECC was applied ECC TIME GROUP ID ldentifies a group of readings within a file HEADER FLAGS INSTRUMENT ID Secondary Dosimeter Identification Chipset Settings Treatment 16 16s Austin Roy F iene lt 2 7 Instrument Identification Workspace Properties 16 16s Table 6 Response Database Common Section Data Fields Default Format Optional Format Acquisition Setup Dialog Box integer Primary Dosimeter Identification Chipset Settings String 16 16s d1 p12 Dosimeter ID d s Acquisition Setup Dialog Signed decimal integer Box cuit ECC Database Long decimal integer ld 930318 See Table 4 Mar 18 1993 ECC Database Long decimal integer ld 235845 See Table 5 11 58 45 04 PM Long decimal integer decimal integer od 8800 W 0 0802 Data Field Label Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page A 19 Appendix B ASCII Export File Default Format Description Variable Type Optional Format INSTRUMENT_HOST_ID Host Software Version Internal Signed decimal integer d AMEN INSTRUMENT_PHOT_ID INSTRUMENT_TRNS_ID INSTRUMENT_TYPE NUM_OF_ELEMENTS OPERATOR_ID RCF_DATE RCF_TIME READING_DATE READING_TIME READING_FUNCTION Photronics Software Version Signed decimal integer Harshaw Reader Model Intern
200. n the QC Electronics Database If any mean value is not within the user specified range the words HIGH or LOW appear next to the number that is out of range Depending on the value and the characteristic a high or low reading may indicate a possible need for maintenance and or recalibration of the reader The meaning of each of the measured characteristic is as follows Temperature is the temperature measured at the heating jets it should be approximately room temperature after a two hour cooling period High Voltage measures the voltage at each photomultiplier tube It is manually adjustable but should not be changed unnecessarily as it affects all the Reader Calibration Factors Plus 15 Volts is the voltage powering the analog electronics Nominal Suggested Function Value Tolerance Temperature room temperature 10 30 C High Voltage previous reading 5v Plus 15 Volts 15 v 0 5 v Minus 15 Volts 15 v 0 5 v D A Reference 8 193 v 0 015 v Ground Ov 0 020 v Reference Light varies with reader 10 PMT Noise varies with reader 100 ES Table 7 3 Electronics QC Functions Minus 15 Volts is the voltage powering the analog electronics D A Reference is a reference voltage of the digital to analog conversion circuit Ground is the reference potential of the analog signals the low limit may be set as a negative number Reference Light is the equivalent TLD measurement of the constant light
201. n 2 0 Customizing the Export File describes how to select and modify the format of the fields in the WinREMS Response Database for inclusion in an ASCII File Section 3 0 Tutorial gives the operator a step by step process for producing and verifying a customized ASCII Export File Section 4 0 Response Database Specification provides a detailed listing of all the fields in the Response Database their sources their default formats and any optional formats Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page A 4 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual Appendix B ASCII Export File TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Page 1 0 Default File tos Bere seg A A a A 5 ll Medel 8900 and S500 E E A 5 1 2 Models 4500 6600 and 8800 0 2 eee cee eee A 7 2 0 Customizing the Export File 0 0 0 0 0000005 A 10 2 1 Data Field Selection 3 ses A ds oink SAD pala A 10 2 2 Output Format Specification 2k ada tiene bens Sala WANNA Kaha mng A 11 3 0 Tutorial 3 1 Modifying the Configuration File a A 15 3 2 Sample Configuration and Export FileS o ooo oo ooooo o A 16 3 3 Testing a New Configuration File erica A 16 4 0 Response Database Specification 0 0 00 0 00 A 17 ILLUSTRATIONS Figure Page 1 Default Export File Configuration File 3500 and 5500 Readers A 5 2 Default ASCII Export File 3500 and 5500 Readers A 5 3 Default Export File Configuration File 4500 660
202. nC gU 0 0503125 nC 409 973 nC Al m Curent TTP New i h Delete Paste Cancel i Help Figure 7 25 Time Temperature Profile Setup Dialog Box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 31 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 5 Read cont d 7 5 3 TTP Setup cont d Number This identifying number is assigned by WinREMS based on the Title entered by the operator The system will always select the lowest available number Date Edited This field is modified by WinREMS whenever a change is made in any of the fields in this dialog box Edited by This field displays the name of the last person to edit this TTP based on the name entered in the Password Dialog Box Date Calibrated This field displays the last date that this TTP was calibrated Elements enabled These four check boxes indicate which TL elements of a card will be heated See Figure 7 26 for the orientation of these positions on a TL Card These boxes also serve as column headings for the remaining data fields on this screen When reading TLD Cards whole body or environmental or DXT RAD Ringlets activate each position which has a chip in it When reading EXT RAD Dosimeters Chipstrates activate Positions ii and iii if both are populated with dosimeters Regions The fields in this group box define ranges for four Regions of Interest ROI and a Cali
203. nREMS Page 6 2 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 6 0 Calibration Procedures cont d 6 1 Introduction cont d 6 1 2 Dosimeter Configurations cont d Dosimeters come in two configurations Chipstrates EXT RAD system and Ringlets DXT RAD system For a complete description of both systems see Section 1 5 Dosimeters Both types of Extremity Dosi meters are treated the same by WinREMS Extremity Dosimeters are individually identified in the database by their own barcode IDs A separate record is generated for each Dosimeter The database also maintains a record of the position in the Carrier Card 1 2 3 or 4 in which each Dosimeter s ECC was generated although the ECC is applied to the readings regardless of the position in which the Dosimeter is read The system can generate Field Extremity Dosimeters Calibration Extremity Dosimeters QC Extremity Dosimeters and Blank Extremity Dosimeters Section 6 3 Extremity Dosimeters describes all the calibration procedures for a system with extremity dosimeters Mixed Systems Dosimeter Cards and Extremity Dosimeters In a system where there are both Dosimeter Cards and Extremity Dosimeters it is best to set up two separate subsystems by using separate workspaces for each type of dosimeter You then can generate independent Calibration Cards and Calibration Extremity Dosimeters 6 1 3 Procedure Overview This subsection gives an overview of the instructions for calibrat
204. nce Light Calibration Dosimeter Field Dosimeter QC Dosimeter Blank Dosimeter Calibration Extremity Field Extremity QC Extremity Blank Extremity Acquisition Mode This field defines the mode in which the dosimeters were read as entered on the Start Dialog Box Section 7 5 1 Start You may select All or any of the following modes Generate Calibration Dosimeter Calibrate Reader Calibrate Dosimeter Read Field Dosimeters Anneal Dosimeters Generate Calibration Extremity Calibrate Extremity Reader Calibrate Extremity Read Field Extremity Anneal Extremity Date Time This field allows you to select a time period for the readings you wish to see There are three options No Limits will place no restrictions on the date and time the dosimeters were read After will select all readings from the date you enter up to the present time Range allows you to set start and end dates for the readings you wish to see Dosimeter ID This field allows you to base your selection on Dosimeter IDs There are three options No Limits will place no restrictions on the Dosimeter ID Single Value will select all readings for one Dosimeter ID subject to any other limitations you may have entered Range will allow you to select a range of Dosimeters IDs you wish to see Patient ID This field allows sele
205. neral licensee you must comply with all the provisions in 10 CFR 31 5 or the equivalent regulations of an Agreement State These regulations are summarized below 1 You must assure that all labels affixed to the device at the time of receipt are maintained in a clearly visible legible form You must not remove the labels and you must comply with all instructions or precautions provided on the labels 2 You must set up and operate the TLD system in accordance with the manufac turer s instructions as outlined in the instruction manual 3 You must not attempt to remove or disturb the Reference Light Assembly 4 Leak testing of the Reference Light Assembly is not required 5 You must not abandon the TLD system 6 You must not export the TLD system except in accordance with 10 CFR 110 or the equivalent regulations of an Agreement State 7 Innormal situations you may transfer the device only to persons holding a specific license for the device not a general license issued by the NRC or an Agreement State 8 If your company is sold or otherwise transferred to another organization and the TLD system remains in its fixed location you may transfer the device to another general licensee However you must notify the NRC within 30 days of the transfer 9 You must comply with the NRC requirements or those of an Agreement State for reporting radiation incidents theft or loss of the TLD system Optional Sr Irra
206. nerate Calibration Dosimeters Dialog Box Figure 7 28 into view Enter an Acceptable ECC Range for each chip position This value will determine the deviation from the mean 1 0 that will be considered acceptable for Calibration Cards Enter it as the Upper and Lower Limits of a range for example 0 91 1 11 Generally this range should be narrower for Calibration Dosimeters than for Field Dosimeters You may still use cards which fall outside of this range by calibrating them as Field Cards 11 Initiate Calculations Click on the Compute Button to calculate the ECCs with the new range All records that are within the Acceptable Range will be highlighted those outside the range will not If you do not like the results you may change the Upper and Lower Limits and calculate the ECCs again You may repeat this process until you are satisfied with the results For a detailed explanation of all the fields on this screen see Section 7 6 1 Generate Calibration Dosimeters NOTE When performing Step 12 you must ensure that no workstations are reading dosimeters with ECCs applied The calibra tion process takes a few seconds and no workstations are able to access the ECC Database during that time If a reader attempts to access the ECC database while it is being updated it may time out and stop operations Model 8800 Automatic TLD Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 6 7 Operator s Manual 6 0 Calibration Procedu
207. nes and the correct data will be displayed on the left side of the screen The procedure for the remaining three ROIs is the same except that another key must also be held down as indicated in the following table ROI Key Color 1 none Green 2 Shift Orange 3 Control Hot Pink 4 Alt Yellow E Glow Curves 1 ROIs may be selected either on the TTP before the readings are taken or afterwards through the Variable ROI screen Note that integrals for ROIs set in the TTP are stored in the database those that are created via the Variable ROI Screen are not stored in the database The fields on this screen are the same as the four curve view except for the box Immediately below the dosimetric information box In this box there are four fields showing information about one channel or data point on the curve The data in this area responds in real time to the channel on which the cursor is located As the cursor is moved this data changes to reflect the current position of the cursor While moving the cursor on the glow curve you may also click on the right mouse button to see the data presented in a floating box attached to the cursor Figure 7 10 05 11 2000 15 28 11 1G 9045905 Gen Cal Cards 54 91 nC 0379 ROM 2 579 ROI2 31 20 ROI3 21 10 ROI4 EEG REF 24 n 1 5 51 100 101 150 151 200 a EN o Intensity nA o Channel 156 Intensity 23 670 n Temperature 300 C Time 10 40 se
208. ngle Value will select all readings for one Dosimeter ID subject to any other limitations you may have entered Range will allow you to select a range of Dosimeters IDs you wish to see There are three command buttons at the bottom of the Search ECC Database Dialog Box Figure 7 13 operating as follows OK will perform the selection according to the criteria entered and display the results as shown in Figure 7 14 You may print or export all the selected records or a highlighted subset of the records by following the instructions in the corresponding subsection of the File Menu Section 7 1 File Cancel will close the dialog box without selecting any records Help will activate the WinREMS Help System for this dialog box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 15 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 3 Search cont d 7 3 2 ECC Database cont d The column headings in this view are defined as follows Dosimeter ID This column displays the identification dosimeter Date Time These two columns identify when the reading was taken You may change the format of these two columns by using the Windows operating system Click on Start Settings Control Panel Regional Settings and then the Date and Time Tabs Reads Since first ECC This column shows the number of times each dosimeter has been read for any purpose since it was first calibrated Re
209. nship beginning lt end If you make an entry that would violate this rule the system will warn you and place the cursor on the offending field An ROI may be turned off by entering 0 for both the upper and lower limits A Calibration Region may not be turned off Preheat The fields in this group box define the preheat portion of the TTP Temperature Preheat temperature is the temperature in degrees Celsius to which the gas will be heated before the start of data acquisition The heating rate is 100 C per second with the last 25 at the rate of 30 C per second to reduce overshoot The Preheat Temperature is limited to 200 C Changing the Preheat temperature will change a calibrated TTP to uncalibrated subject to the action of the OK and Cancel buttons Time This field is for the dwell time in seconds at the Preheat temperature beginning after the control reaches the Preheat temperature If Time is set to 0 the temperature will still be increased to the Preheat temperature prior to acquisition but with no dwell time TTP to uncalibrated subject to the action of the OK and Cancel Buttons Acquire The fields in this group box define the data acquisition portion of the TTP Temperature Rate These fields define the rate of increase in temperature during data acquisition in degrees Celsius per second The maximum rate is 30 C per second the minimum is 1 C Changing the Temperature rate will c
210. ntrol motor that drives the Transport Rack A yes in this field indicates that the rack is under direct control of the motor A no indicates that the Rack is not being controlled by the motor and can be moved by hand The Rack can be returned to servomotor control by executing the Normalize Rack command from the left side of the screen CARD The fields in this box indicate the status of the sensors that detect the presence and orientation of a card in the Card Pocket of the Rack In a normal Read or Irradiate cycle the card passes these sensors before it reaches the Card ID Position The Detected Field indicates the presence yes or absence no of a card in the Card Pocket The Oriented Field indicates that the Card in the Card Pocket is correctly oriented for reading It is important that a card be correctly oriented because the identification of the four TLD elements in the card is based on their position relative to the notched corner of the card see Figure 1 5 This field normally displays no changing to yes only momentarily as a card passes by with the correct orientation If this field displays yes at any other time there may be a failure in the sensor system If this sensor detects an incorrectly oriented card in normal operation it will place the card in the Number 8 Cartridge without reading it IRRADIATOR The Shutter Field indicates the status of the shutter coverin
211. nu Figure 8 1 select View Glow Curves to bring up the Glow Curves View Screen Figure 8 4 Table 6 2 Set TTP From the WinREMS Main Menu select Read TTP Setup to bring the Time Temperature Profile Dialog Box Figure 7 25 into view Set a TTP to the conditions shown in the appropriate column of Table 6 1 Set Acquisition Parameters From the WinREMS select Read Acquisition Setup to bring the Acquisition setup dialog Box into view Figure 7 23 Set the parameters in this box to the conditions in Table 6 2 Set Read Dosimeters Dialog Box From the WinREMS Main Menu select Read Start to bring up the Read Dosimeters Dialog Box figure 7 21 Enter a unique Group ID Name You may enter different Group IDs on each line or you may use one Group ID on more than one line In the TTP Field select the TTP Title that you established in Step 4 In the Acquisition Setup Field select the Acquisition Setup that you established in Step 5 Acquisition Setup Conditions for Generating Calibration Cards Acquisition Mode Apply Calibration None Employee ID Disabled Export Format None PMT Noise Interval 10 PMT Noise Range Ref Light Interval 10 Ref Light Range QC Card Interval 0 QC Card Range Blank Card Interval 0 Blank Card Range Not applicable Not applicable Generate Calibration dosimeters 10 to 2000 picoCoulombs Varies with instrument Model 8800 Automatic TLD Reader with WinREMS Page 6 6 8
212. o mS C PROGRAM FILES BICRON WINREMS demo m6 CAPROGRAM FILES BICRON WINREMS demo ms Cancel Apply Files Databases Figure 7 40 Database Location Dialog Box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 55 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 9 Workspace cont d 7 9 1 Properties cont d 7 9 1 2 Databases cont d EQC DB The Electronics QC stores all the data from every Electronics QC test A default database name is created as a part of each new workspace You may use a unique name for your database or you may use the name of a EQC Database in another workspace and share the information among multiple workspaces It is strongly recommended that you not put data from more than one Reader in any one EQC Database because you cannot search the database by Instrument Number when retrieving a record Log DB The Log Database stores all error messages dosimeter rejection messages and operator comments You may use a unique name for your database or you may use the name of a Log Database in another workspace and share the information among multiple workspaces While it is generally advisable for each Reader to have its own Log Database it is not necessary because you can search the Log Database by Instrument ID Subject DB The Subject Database is not operational on the Model 8800 version of WinREMS 7 9 1 3 Files Select the Files Tab to view the
213. o the database If you do not want to accept the computed RCFs you may click on the Cancel Button 13 Remove Cards Remove the Cards from the Reader 6 2 4 Calibrate Dosimeters This section describes the procedure for generating the ECCs for Dosimeters from a calibrated TTP This procedure is the same whether the dosimeters are new or are being re calibrated as part of a regular QA program In the case of a re calibration the system will make the new ECC the current ECC You may also mix new and used dosimeters in the same batch the system will record both properly 1 Check TTP Calibration Confirm that you have a calibrated TTP with values appropriate for the type of dosimeters being calibrated If not calibrate one as described in Section 6 2 3 Calibrate Reader 2 Prepare Dosimeters Prepare and expose the dosimeters to be calibrated in accord with Section 6 2 1 Prepare Dosimeters 3 Load Cards into Reader Load the TLD Cards into the Reader according to the instructions in 3 4 1 Cards 4 Set Reader Function From the 8800 Host Main Menu Figure 8 1 select View Glow Curves to bring up the Glow Curves View Screen Figure 8 4 5 Check TTP From the WinREMS Main Menu select Read TTP Setup to bring the Time Temperature Profile Dialog Box Figure 7 25 into view Select the TTP that you plan to use and confirm that it is correct for the dosimeters you are calibrating See Table 6 1 Model 8800 Automatic
214. odology cont d 6 4 2 Reader Calibration Factors The only part of the system that is likely to become unstable over long periods of time is the TLD Reader The radiation sources are usually stable or at least it is relatively easy to apply correction factors to account for the decay of the radioactive material The TL dosimeters under con trolled operational conditions will not change their TL efficiency and the irradiation geometry can be easily maintained For the Reader to be able to consistently convert stored TL information to measurable electric signals charge it is convenient to express the ratio between the average TL response of the Calibration Dosimeters and the delivered radiation quantity L in terms of one variable Since the numerical value of this variable will be mainly dependent on the condition of the Reader at a given date and time it is appropriate to call this variable Reader Calibration Factor RCF The value of the RCF although not expressed yet in terms of real dose units provides the main link between the TL response in terms of charge or counts and the absorbed dose or dose equivalent in terms of Gray or Seivert respectively The RCF is defined as Basa RCF T 13 where lt Q gt is the average reported charge of a set of Calibration Dosimeters exposed to a known quantity of radiation L As discussed in the previous section the radiation quantity L can be expressed in any convenient units Fo
215. og Transport Maintenance Achvity Log History Queue Print Ctrl P Print Setup Print Preview Figure 8 3 View Menu The Temperature scale on the right side of each curve is fixed ranging from 0 to 600 C In addition this screen displays numeric data about each curve in the block immediately to the left of each curve The first line displays the Chip ID if any for the glow curve This field is only filled if you are reading extremity dosimeters The computed result total integral of the reading is displayed on the next line If neither of the calibration factors RCF and ECC was applied the units shown are nC nanocoulombs When the RCF is applied the units change to the calibration units shown on the TTP Screen Section 7 5 3 TTP Setup Applying the ECC does not affect the units ECC is a dimensionless parameter When calibration factors are applied the second line shows the Exposure in units defined by the RCF calculated according to the following formula ECC charge integral RCF Exposure Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 8 3 Operator s Manual 8 0 8800 Host Reference cont d 8 1 View Screens cont d 8 1 1 Glow Curve cont d The following four lines show the computed integral for each ROI Region of Interest defined in the TTP in the same units as the first line The next two lines show the RCF and ECC when they have been applied The last
216. omment anytime the Read Dialog Box is visible including times when the reader is reading cards Done When you are through reading a batch of Dosimeters clicking on this button will close the dialog box During the read process this button is not available grayed out Help Clicking on this button will activate the help system for this dialog box Add Comment to Log Database Ea dd a comment of any length Figure 7 22 Add Comment Dialog Box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 23 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 5 Read cont d 7 5 2 Acquisition Setup Click on Read Acquisition to bring the Acquisition Setup Dialog Box Figure 7 23 into view Alternatively you may click on the ACQ button on the toolbar Before the dialog box appears you will be prompted for a user name and password After a valid entry you will have access to the screen in edit mode If you do not have a valid name and password you may click on the Cancel Button for access in view mode The functions and limitations of every field on this screen are as follows Setup Info The fields in this group box all relate to the identification and purpose of the current Acquisition Setup Acquisition Setup x m Setup Info Title Production y Edited by wilder Acquisition Mode Read Dosimeters y T Extremity Date Edited 06 13 2000 Apply Calibration Iv Element
217. on Setup dialog box Figure 7 23 Pre Anneal These two radio buttons determine whether the QC Dosimeters will first be annealed When this option is Enable each QC Dosimeter is annealed to remove any residual signal before it is exposed and read If this option is Disable the QC Dosimeters are not annealed before being exposed and read Exposure These three fields are used to set the amount of exposure that the QC Dosimeters receive Note The Exposure parameters on the Auto QC dialog box are independent of any parameters set in the Expose Initiate dialog box Figure 8 18 The setup parameters on the Expose Setup dialog box Figure 8 20 are used for exposures initiated by both the Expose Initiate dialog box Figure 8 18 and the Auto QC dialog box Figure 8 26 Mode Mode determines whether an entry is entered in the Time field or in the Value field when defining the exposure the QC Dosimeters receive When one of these two options Value or Time is selected the selected field becomes highlighted indicating that it is now a data entry field and that an entry value is expected The field that is not selected Value or Time is grayed out This field then becomes a display field and is calculated automatically based on the calibration values and the decay rate In other words e If Value is selected in the Mode field an entry must be made in the Value field and no ent
218. on 5 2 3 Blank Dosimeters Calibration defines the dosimeters as being used for calibration purposes Extremity A check in this box identifies the dosimeters as Extremity Dosimeters Upper Limit Lower Limit In these two fields you set the range of acceptable values for the ECCs They need not be symmetrical about 1 0 For Field Dosimeters 30 is a commonly used value Because the ECC is applied as a multiplier according to the formula ECC charge RCF Upper and Lower Limits of 1 43 and 0 77 represent 30 Any dosimeter with one or more ECC outside the acceptable range will be rejected You may change these values as often as you like to re evaluate the dosimeters Exposure Irradiation This row is where you enter the amount of radiation to which the dosimeters were exposed Four fields are provided so that if your source is not uniform you may enter a different value for each position You must enter a value for each position that was read Compute Clicking on this button will regenerate the ECCs Accept Clicking on this button will accept the ECCs displayed in the Results section and apply the values to the ECC Database Close Clicking on this button will close this dialog box without saving any changes made after the last time the Accept Button was clicked Ifthe Accept Button was not clicked no changes will be made to the ECC Database Help Clicking on this button will bring up the h
219. on WinREMS tldexpt cfg Figure 7 41 File Location Dialog Box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 56 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 9 Workspace cont d 7 9 1 Properties cont d 7 9 1 3 Files cont d Chipset File The Chipset File is is not operational with Model 8800 in the current release of WinREMS Export ASCII File This file establishes the format of the ASCII data file that may be exported during acquisition or from the File menu The default format and instructions for modifying this file are given in Appendix B 7 9 1 4 Password File Select the Password Tab to view the Password File Location Dialog Box Figure 7 42 This file retains user names and passwords for all operators who use this Workspace Note that Password files are not generated by the Workspace Wizard A default password file PASSWORD CFG is loaded when the system is installed Therefore when you create a new workspace it will automatically use the same password file In order to set up a separate set of user names and passwords you will have to copy PASSWORD CFG to a new file name and then edit this field to show the new name See Section 7 9 2 Password Maintenance for details on how to edit user names and passwords 7 9 1 5 Print Files Selecting any of the Print tabs will bring up a dialog box similar to Figure 7 40 The fields in this box allow you to edit the
220. onic noise generated by the photomultiplier tube expressed in nanocoulombs E Electronics Quality Control 1 Electronics QC 15 Volts 15 Volts vDC Date Time 05 25 2000 01 37 00 PM 6600 9912183 i 23 41 ii 23 43 23 19 23 16 igh Instrument ID Position Temp oC Voltage VDC 844 844 844 844 If you hover over any of the electronics results columns a floating box will appear giving the acceptable range for those results as shown in the 15 Volts Column in Figure 7 18 In any cell where the results were outside of the acceptable range the cell will be displayed in red as shown in the Noise Reading Column in Figure 7 18 You may highlight a subset of the records for further processing such as printing or exporting Highlighting records is done in the same way as most Windows programs by clicking on the record you wish to highlight In this screen however the mouse pointer must be in the extreme left gray column To highlight one record click on the desired line in the gray column To highlight a number of contiguous records click on the first record and lt Shift gt click on the last of the desired records To highlight multiple non contiguous records lt Ctl gt click on each of the desired records You may highlight all records by clicking in the gray box immediately to the left of the Dosimeter ID column heading You may print or export all the selected records or a highlighted subset of the r
221. onics QC readings are recorded in the Daily QA Database You are responsible for setting the acceptable limits for the values that appear in the lower part of the Electronics QC screen Some general guidelines for these values are given in Table 5 1 The specific meaning and indications of these tests are as follows Temperature is the gas temperature measured at the heater nozzles it should be approximately room temperature after a two hour stabilization period If the value is only slightly out of range the ambient temperature is probably outside of the limits set by the user Try resetting this parameter If the difference is great or a negative temperature is indicated then a thermocouple problem is likely Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 5 5 Operator s Manual 5 0 Quality Assurance cont d Nominal Suggested 5 1 Daily QA cont d Panga weve l bare emperature room temperature 5 1 4 Electronics QC cout d High Voltage compare to previous reading 5 v 5 1 4 2 Test Analysis cont d Plus 15 volts 15 v 05 v Minus 15 volts 15 v 0 5v High Voltage measures the supply D A reference 8 193 v 0 010 v voltage to each photomultiplier tube The Ground 0 i a PUNAN 1 F he fi 4 Reference light compare to previous reading 10 voltage is set at the factory to give 0 PMT noise compare to previous reading 10 nC mR It is manually adjustable but should not be changed unnecessa
222. onse Database Results View iii iv Lo co o A37 PMT Noise Readings Total 2 Mean 0454 0347 0407 Standard Deviation 25 95 1311 0457 5 12 9 62 Reference Light Readings Total 2 Mean 344 0 235 8 Standard Deviation 6885 365 8843 N 78 3 Mark as Field y J Extremity Upper Limit ha 1 3 Lower Limit foes 0 85 Irradiation 500 500 TUHAN kb FA o o Accept Close Help Figure 7 30 Dosimeter Calibration Dialog Box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 44 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 6 Calibration cont d 7 6 3 Dosimeter Calibration cont d Total This field displays the number of Reference Light Readings Mean This field displays the average readings in nanocoulombs of the Reference Light Readings Standard Deviation This field displays the percent standard deviation of the Reference Light Readings Mark As From this drop down list you will select the purpose for which the dosimeter will be used The options are as follows Field defines the dosimeters as being used for dosimetry purposes QC designates the dosimeters as those that will be used for quality control purposes See Section 5 2 4 for an explanation of QC Dosimeters Blank designates the dosimeters for use as Blank Dosimeters For an explanation of Blank Dosimeters see Secti
223. ontact between the Commission and the transferee or 11 Where the device is held in storage in the original shipping container at its intended location of use prior to initial use by a general licensee 10 Shall comply with the provisions of 20 402 and 20 403 of this chapter for reporting radiation incidents theft or loss of licensed material but shall be exempt from the other requirements of Parts 19 20 and 21 of this chapter d The general license in paragraph a of this section does not authorize the manufacture or import of devices containing byproduct material
224. ontrol the number of readings taken to generate the statistics in Figure 5 1 Electronics QC Setup z 5 mir Temperature High Voltage 100 15 Volt Supply 15 5 15 Volt Supply EE 15 D A Reference 8 208 Ground 0 02 Light Reading 1500 Noite Reading p o dm alll o a u Alalo milo pani ra om oo 4 oo ijo o Ka am E T Number of Photronics Samples Number of Light Reading Samples Number of Noise Reading Samples oll l li n on 7 T TA um O o bo o um o Pa o TA o 2 3 3 E A j oy oc p min no O gan um o a oo poop 2 8 Cancel Figure 5 2 Electronics QC Setup Dialog Box 8800 W 0 0802 Change Parameter Make any desired changes click on OK to close the Electronics QC Setup Dialog Box You should not change these fields without good reason however as they are an integral part of your Quality Assurance recordkeeping program Re test From the Main Menu select QC Electronics QC and Start to bring the Electronics QC Test Results Screen into view Click on the Start Button to start the Electronics QC Test 3 cu me gt jum 2 2 sl e 3 a gt alo ENE o x ah cay co no ra o oo w j E n en co w malala D an oo o Pa o M3 o o ra a o ra a Gar on ROS o o Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 5 7 Op
225. or one year after the next required test of the on off mechanism and indicator is performed or until the sealed source is Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page A 26 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual Appendix C CFR 31 5 transferred or disposed of Records which are required by paragraph c 3 of this section shall be maintained for a period of two years from the date of the recorded event or until the device is transferred or disposed of 5 Upon the occurrence of a failure of or damage to or any indication of a possible failure of or damage to the shielding of the radioactive material or the on off mechanism or indicator or upon the detection of 0 005 microcurie of more removable radioactive material shall immediately suspend operation of the device until it has been repaired by the manufacturer or other person holding a specific license pursuant to Parts 30 and 32 of this chapter or from an Agreement State to repair such devices or disposed of by transfer to a person authorized by a specific license to receive the byproduct material contained in the device and within 30 days furnish to the director of the appropriate Nuclear Regulatory Commission Inspection and Enforcement Regional Office listed in Appendix D of Part 20 of this chapter a report containing a brief description of the event and the remedial action taken 6 shall not abandon the device containing byproduct material 7 Shall not exp
226. ords for example Figures 7 9 7 10 the records can be selectively highlighted for additional processing by clicking on them Clicking to select records requires that the cursor be in the extreme left column at which time the normal arrow will turn into a black horizontal arrow You may then use lt Control gt click and lt Shift gt click as you would in any Windows function Clicking on the box at the very top of the column will select all records You may also use the arrow keys to move the pointer and use the space bar as a toggle to select deselect individual records 3 1 3 Password A password is necessary to perform certain functions in WinREMS There are two levels of password protection An Administrator has access to all functions of WinREMS An Operator has access to all functions except Password Maintenance A user without a password can read dosimeters and perform most functions but cannot edit the Acquisition Setup the TTP Setup or the Workspace Properties Changes to the operator password list are discussed in Section 7 9 2 Password Maintenance 3 1 4 Initiating WinREMS A shortcut to WinREMS has been installed on the desktop screen Simply double click on the WinREMS icon to bring up the WinREMS Mann Screen This screen has only three items on the Main Menu Click on File and open a workspace either new or existing to bring up the complete Main Menu Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 3
227. orm feed b backspace backslash character single quote mark character Y double quote mark character blank space s The formatted value for a response field will be presented in the Exported ASCII File according to the field type and its specification statement The formatted values in the ASCII File will be presented along with any special characters or escape sequences as they appear in the specification statement see Figures 1 and 3 Format specifications are explained in Section 4 0 Response Database Specification Examples of Export Configuration File line entries with format specifications are as follows Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page A 12 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual Appendix B ASCII Export File 2 0 Customizing The Export File cont d 2 2 Output Format Specification cont d Example 1 Subject ID Data Field SUBJECT ID 11 11s This specification will send to the Exported ASCII File a left justified subject name up to 11 characters in length followed by a blank and enclosed in double quotes Williamson Example 2 Response Data Field RESPONSE 3 4 This will export a floating point value containing all digits to the left of the decimal point 4 digits to the right of the decimal point followed by a comma and space 23 0239 Example 3 TL Read Date Data Field READING DATE SB Sd SY This will send a
228. ort the device containing byproduct material except in accordance with Part 110 of this chapter 8 Except as provided in paragraph c 9 of this section shall transfer or dispose of the device containing byproduct material only by transfer to persons holding a specific license pursuant to Parts 30 and 32 of this chapter or from an Agreement State to receive the device and within 30 days after transfer of a device to a specific licensee shall furnish to the Director of Nuclear Material Safety and Safeguards U S Nuclear Regulatory Commission Washington D C 20555 a report containing identification of the device by manufacturer s name and model number and the name and address of the person receiving the device No report is required if the device is transferred to the specific licensee in order to obtain a replacement device 9 Shall transfer the device to another general licensee only 1 Where the device remains in use at a particular location In such case the transferor shall give the transferee a copy of this section and any safety documents identified in the label of the device and within 30 days of the transfer report to the director of Nuclear Material Safety and Safeguards U S Nuclear Regulatory Commission Washington D C 20555 the manufacturers name and model number of device transferred the name and address of the transferee and the name and or position of an individual who may who may constitute a point of c
229. osimeters cont d 1 5 2 EXT RAD Extremity Dosimeters cont d Body Attachment Before being issued to the wearer one or two Chipstrates are placed in a plastic pouch which is then hermetically heat sealed for environmental protection The pouches have slots for insertion of adjustable length straps Figure 1 9 to fit comfortably around fingers or other body parts The pouches can be barcoded by the user or may have clear plastic on one side to facilitate reading the barcode before removal Upon completion of a field assignment cycle the pouches are cut and discarded and the Chipstrates extracted for insertion into the carrier cards The bands can be saved for reuse Figure 1 9 Chipstrate Strap Carrier Cards These cards hold up to two Chipstrates each to enable processing in the Model 8800 hot gas TLD Readers The Carrier Cards are of the same configuration as the Whole Body Dosimeter Cards This enables Chipstrates to be read in the same Readers as 8800 Series Cards The Chipstrates are easily inserted into and removed from the Carrier Cards using tweezers Figure 1 10 The Carrier Cards and the Chipstrates are barcoded and the 8800 Reader can scan all three barcodes By means of an Employee ID station or an Extremity Chain of Custody System the Chipstrate barcodes can be associated with the wearer s ID for complete Chain of Custody of the dosimetric data Figure 1 10 Chipstrate Carrier Card Model 8800 Autom
230. ost Reference cont d 8 3 Expose Function cont d 8 3 2 Setup Select Expose Setup to open the Expose Setup Dialog Box Figure 8 20 Before the dialog box opens you are prompted for a username and password After entering this information the Expose Setup dialog box opens In this box you can enter data that defines the strength of the source at a point in time The software will compensate for degradation of the source s strength over time based on the half life of the source Calibration Rate This numeric data entry field is the calibrated rate of exposure in units per second for the specific source in the Irradiator on the date of calibration Acceptable entries are 1 00 to 999 99 in increments of 0 01 Calibration Unit This multiple selection field defines the unit in which the Irradiator is calibrated Available entries are gU generic Units and mR equivalent The source can be calibrated in only one unit at any given time The gU is defined as an arbitrary unit that expresses the amount of radiation delivered during a fixed period of time by a specific source with specific geometry to a dosimeter located at a set distance from the source Its value lies in its use in a system that includes an algorithm calibrated to a known reference source e g NIST Calibration Date This required data entry field identifies the effective date of Calibration Rate Last Date Edited 02 26 01 Current Ex
231. ost should WinREMS be unable to receive the record This might happen for example if the communications cable became disconnected or the PC lost power In such circumstances WinREMS can retrieve the last record from the Reader To retrieve the last record you must first be in Read mode with the same data in the Read Dosimeters Dialog Box Figure 7 21 as when the last record was read From the Main Menu select Read Retransmit If the last record had not been received by WinREMS it will be transmitted from the Reader and the message Retransmitting previous record will appear on the message line When the process is completed the message Retransmit complete will appear on the message line If the last record has been received either normally or by the Retransmit function the message Response record already exists in the database will appear along with some other information Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 36 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 6 Calibration For an overview of calibration purpose and procedure see Section 6 1 Introduction For the theory behind the calibration procedure see Section 6 4 Calibration Methodology 7 6 1 Generate Calibration Dosimeters The Generate Calibration Dosimeters procedure that is generally used only during the initial installation before the Reader is calibrated A sample of 1 2 of the projec
232. otal integral expressed in the units defined by the RCF if applied If no RCF was applied the integral is expressed in nanocoulombs Ifthe ECC was applied in the reading it will also be incorporated in the total integral Immediately below the total integral are the integrals for as many Regions of Interest ROD as were selected expressed in the same units as the total integral Immediately below the ROIs are the ECC and RCF values if they were applied The next line shows the Intensity of the peak channel in nanoamperes The last four lines in each box show the ranges of the ROIs if any were generated You may click on any of the four graphic boxes to bring the adjustable ROI view to the screen Figure 7 10 Intensity nA Da ANAWA L o 100 150 200 Channel 0 TE j 1 Y V 200 50 100 150 200 Channel Intensity nA De SAnpesadua L Figure 7 9 Response Record Glow Curve View 4 chip dosimeter Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 10 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 3 Search cont d 7 3 1 Response Database cont d 7 3 1 1 Glow Curves cont d On this view you may also establish or change the ROIs dynamically To create ROI 1 move the cursor to the first channel of the range you wish to define as ROI 1 drag the cursor to the last channel of the range and release the mouse button The range will be defined by vertical green li
233. ous column a 1 18 11 14 M m1 m Cardid Exposure Value Exposure Time 500 00 gu 500 00 gU 500 00 gU 500 00 gU 500 00 gU 500 00 gU 14 32 44 14 33 47 14 34 39 14 35 51 14 36 40 14 37 55 103304 0500968 0524385 0526542 0535791 1439453 50 62 sec 50 62 sec 50 62 sec 50 62 sec 50 62 sec 50 62 sec Figure 8 5 Expose Loge View Screen Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 8 5 Operator s Manual 8 0 8800 Host Reference cont d 8 1 View Screens cont d 8 1 3 Transport Maintenance Select View Transport Maintenance to bring the Transport Maintenance View Screen Figure 8 6 into view On this screen you can observe the status of many of the sensors and controls in the Reader and you can selectively exercise many of the commands that are normally executed as part of the process of reading a group of cards The left side of the screen has the fields necessary for you to execute several commands that will affect the Transport System These commands can be used to carry out a maintenance function for example Normalize Rack to move some part of the transport mechanism to prepare for maintenance for example Send Rack to Unload Position or to execute a normal command for troubleshooting purposes for example Load Card DISABLE RACK MOTOR CONTROL HOME LOAD CARROUSEL HOME UNLOAD CARROUSEL ADVANCE LOAD CARROUSEL ADVANCE U
234. posure Rate Current Exposure Rate This display field shows the Exposure Rate on the Current Date as displayed in the very bottom right corner of the screen and for the unit displayed in the Unit Field It is calculated from the Calibration Rate and Date and the half life of the source material according to the following formula 0 6931 T I IoXxe 2 Where In Current Exposure Rate I Calibrated Exposure Rate t T To T Current Date To Calibration Date T Half Life of Source Tr Sr 28 6 years This computation is performed in the host computer whenever either the Expose Initiate or Expose Setup Dialog Boxes are accessed or any of the data in them is changed and whenever an exposure is initiated The computation uses the following operator controlled parameters Calibration Rate Calibration Date and the current Date and Time Expose Setup Calibration Rate fi 0 Cancel Paba Calibration Unit o0 sec Help Calibration Date 2 25 01 g 9 995 gU sec Figure 8 20 Expose Setup Dialog Box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 8 18 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 8 0 8800 Host Reference cont d 8 4 Options The 8800 Host provides options Figure 8 21 to allow you to configure certain aspects of the system to suit your specific desires 8 4 1 Alerts The Reader has audible alerts or alarms for certain events This section describes how to change tho
235. pressed in nanocoulombs If any Reference Light reading is outside these limits the Reader will stop taking readings and sound an audible alarm The response record will be flagged with a o The correct setting for any Reader should be based on experience The lower end of the range should not be set to zero as it will not detect any hardware failure which would result in an open circuit QC Dosimeter QC Dosimeters are dosimeters that have been calibrated and designated in the ECC Database as QC Dosimeters They can then be exposed to a known dose and inserted at regular intervals throughout a group of dosimeters being read in any Acquisition Mode QC dosimeters are automatically read with the TTP to which they were calibrated and the reading is reported in the RCF units of that TTP Ifthe reading on a QC Dosimeter is outside the expected range the Reader will sound an audible alarm and stop taking readings The response record will be flagged with an o Interval This field defines the frequency with which the Reader expects to find a QC Dosimeter If it does not find a QC Dosimeter after reading the number of dosimeters entered in this field it will sound an audible alarm and stop taking readings Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 27 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 5 Read cont d 7 5 2 Acquisition Setup cont d Range There are two box
236. procedural instructions From the Main Menu select Search Electronics QC Database to bring up the Electronics QC Database Dialog Box Figure 7 17 From this dialog box you can select Electronics QC records based on the Date and Time the test was run The fields in this box operate as follows Date Time This field allows you to select a time period for the readings you wish to see There are three options as follows No Limits will place no restrictions on the date and time the dosimeters were read After will select all readings from the date you enter up to the present time Range allows you to set start and end dates for the readings you wish to see There are three command buttons at the bottom of the Electronics QC Database Dialog Box Figure 7 17 operating as follows OK will perform the selection according to the criteria entered and display the results as shown in Figure 7 18 You may print or export all the selected records or a highlighted subset of the records by following the instructions in the corresponding subsection of the File Menu Section 7 1 File Search Electronics QC Database Date Time No Limits O After Ok Cancel Help Figure 7 17 Electronics QC Database Dialog Box Cancel will close the dialog box without selecting any records Help will activate the WinREMS Help System for this dialog box The definitions ofthe column headings in this view are as follows Date Time
237. ptable range the reader sounds an audible alarm and stops taking readings The PMT Noise or Dark Current is a reading taken with no dosimeter or any other light source under the PMT Assembly Its purpose is to measure electronic noise in the system and determine if there are any light leaks in the system The Ref Light reading is taken with the Reference Light Assembly directly under the PMTs This assembly provides a consistent light source to detect any drift in the system or accu mulation of dirt on the PMT Lenses A setting of 0 in either the PMT Noise or Ref Light Fields will result in the system not taking any readings of that type QC Cards are calibrated cards that are exposed to a known amount of radiation and placed in the cartridge with the Field Cards These cards confirm the calibration and overall accuracy of the system Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 4 5 Operator s Manual 4 0 Tutorial cont d 4 2 Data Acquisition cont d 4 2 2 Acquisition Setup cont d Blank Cards are cards that have no specific exposure They may be used as control cards to measure background radiation or they may be annealed and used to confirm that there are no extraneous signals in the system These four quality control measures are all available for your use however you control the extent to which they are applied PMT Noise and Reference Light readings are taken automatically
238. r These fields cannot be edited RCF This field displays the Reader Calibration Factor RCF in units of charge nanocoulombs per unit of exposure mrad mrem mRoentgen or gU if the TTP is calibrated If the TTP is not calibrated the fields display 0 The units are displayed in the box at the right end of the line Average Noise This field displays the average of the PMT noise readings from the last calibration group applied to the current TTP or 0 if the TTP is uncalibrated Average Light This field displays the average Reference Light reading from the last calibration group applied to the current TTP or 0 if the TTP is uncalibrated Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 34 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 5 Read cont d 7 5 3 TTP Setup cont d Current TTP When the TTP Setup Dialog Box is on the screen it is important to note that all TTP Setup Records for the current workspace are loaded in active memory The four control buttons in this box apply only to the current record The three buttons below this box apply to all the TTP Setup Records New creates a TTP record Clicking on this button will clear the dialog box of all data without deleting the record currently in view and will create a new TTP Setup Record This record will have the name New TTP in the Title Field which you may edit to any nam
239. r this discussion the unit gU generic unit is defined as the unit which expresses the quantity L For example 1 gU can be equal to the amount of irradiation delivered during a period of one second by a specific source with specific geometry to a dosimeter located at a specific distance from the source Since the definition of the unit gU is somewhat arbitrary once it is defined for a specific source and geometry it will have meaning only for this source here referred to as the Local Source or Reference Source There is some similarity between the gU and the conventional units in the sense that gU is the unit of the quantity L in a similar way as the Roentgen R is the unit of exposure and the Gray and the Seivert are the units of absorbed dose and dose equivalent respectively Unlike the conventional units however which have universal meaning the amount of radiation which corresponds to one gU is completely arbitrary and depends on the way gU is defined Since the purpose of a dosimetry system is to make possible the measurement of absorbed dose or dose equivalent the rest of this section is devoted to the question of how to establish the link between gU and Gray Sievert rad or rem From the discussion so far it is clear that in order to obtain a meaningful RCF it must be possible to accurately reproduce the irradiations of the calibration dosimeters One way to do this is to use periodically calibrated sources that are t
240. r with WinREMS Page 6 4 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 6 0 Calibration Procedures cont d 6 2 Dosimeter Cards This subsection describes all the calibration procedures for a card based system including Personnel Cards and Environmental Cards 6 2 1 Prepare Dosimeters This section defines a recommended procedure for irradiating Dosimeter Cards to be used for any calibration procedure Before beginning any calibration procedures you should establish a fixed fade time for your operations for each of the calibration procedures and record them in the space provided below It is important that the time between irradiation and readout for all dosimeters be consistent in order to keep fading the same from one calibration to the next The specific length of this time is not as important as is its consistency We recommend that the fade time be no less than thirty minutes Otherwise any length of time that suits your operations is acceptable but it must be consistent from one time to the next If the dosimeters are not irradiated simultaneously they should be read in the sequence in which they were irradiated Generate Calibration Dosimeters fade time Reader Calibration Dosimeters fade time Dosimeter Calibration fade time The following procedure will guide you through the process of preparing dosimeters to be read for calibration 1 Anneal Dosimeters Reader anneal the Dosimeters to clear them of all residual e
241. raceable to the NIST or another recognized standards body These sources are usually located at a special testing or calibration laboratory such as Pacific Northwest Laboratories of Battelle In this case the quantity L will be the exposure or whatever quantity the source is calibrated for and the gU will be the Roentgen R or any other corresponding unit Sending the dosimeters to a special laboratory creates many inconveniences however loss of time increased expenses and planning requirements and danger of damage or exposure of the dosimeters during shipping It is also difficult to expose dosimeters on short notice when a new RCF has to be generated when a PMT has been replaced for example In short this approach provides no significant advantage over the use of a local reference source for generating the RCF since the RCF is a relative quantity Model 8800 Automatic TLD Reader with WinREMS Page 6 24 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 6 0 Calibration Procedures cont d 6 4 Calibration Methodology cont d 6 4 2 Reader Calibration Factors cont d If we return now to 12 the ECCs for the Field Dosimeters can be expressed in terms of the RCF using 13 Ecc 2L J qj 14 From 14 L can be expressed in terms of the RCF ECC and q x po E 15 RCF Once ECCs for Calibration Dosimeters and Field Dosimeters have been generated and the local unit gU has been defined the link to a calibrated sour
242. rch Response Database Results View Total This field displays the total number of Reference Light Readings Mean This field displays the average readings in nanocoulombs of the Reference Light Readings Standard Deviation This field displays the percent standard deviation of the Reference Light Noise Readings for each channel Extremity When this box is checked the readings are recognized by WinREMS as being generated from Extremity Dosimeters Irradiation This row of fields is where you enter the amount of radiation to which the dosimeters were exposed Four fields are provided so that if your source is not uniform you may enter a different value for each position TTP Title This field is where you select the TTP you are calibrating this must be the TTP with which the dosimeters were read The TTP Number is displayed immediately to the right of this field Units This field defines the units in which this TTP will be calibrated The selection must correlate with the Irradiation Field value The available units are mrad mrem mR milliRoentgen R gU generic units uSv micro Sievert mSv Sv uGy micro Gray mGy cGy and Gy There are four Buttons located at the bottom of the screen operating as follows Compute Clicking on this button will compute the Pending values If you are not satisfied with the results you may re
243. rd positions with the data record containing the Chipstrate ID in the Card ID field The Carrier ID is not retained as part ofthe data record and will not appear on the PC display 9 Stop Reading The instrument will give an audible warning when it finishes reading all the cards Click on the Stop Button if the Start Button is gray then click on the Done Button You can terminate data acquisition while it is in process by clicking on the WinREMS Stop Button or the Stop Operations Button the Reader s Host interface This action will cause data acquisition to stop at the completion of a read cycle Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 5 1 Operator s Manual 5 0 Quality Assurance The procedures in this section help you maintain the accuracy and reliability of your Model 8800 The topics covered are e Daily QA Procedures routine checks to verify calibration and proper operation of critical electronic circuits e Online QC Tests observations and online tests to confirm that operating conditions remain consistent In the normal course of operations the performance of the Reader may become erratic or error messages may appear on the Results Screen These conditions indicate that diagnostic procedures need to be run to determine the source of the problem Some mechanical adjustments also may be needed occasionally either as a result of operating conditions or as a result of perform
244. re 3 7 using tweezers NOTE Be careful when you insert Chipstrates into a Carrier Card to avoid scratching the barcodes on the Chipstrates Damage to the barcodes will render the Chipstrate unreadable and will cause the card to be rejected by the Reader VINYL POUCH 7 mg cm gt TLD 700 CHIPSTRATE TGS Figure 3 6 Chipstrate and Pouch Figure 3 7 Chipstrate Carrier Card Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 4 1 Operator s Manual 4 0 Tutorial The Windows Radiation Evaluation and Management System WinREMS is a series of programs and databases that receives dosimetry records from the Reader then stores retrieves processes and presents the data in a meaningful form These processes are directed through a series of menus and control screens which are described in detail in Section 7 0 WinREMS Reference This tutorial takes a new user through a typical series of daily activities on an established system It is thorough in its procedural instructions but not comprehensive in scope You should be familiar with Section 3 0 General Instructions before you attempt to perform operations in this section This tutorial will take you step by step through the process of exposing a group of TLDs reading them and performing some data handling operations After you have mastered this section you will need to read Section 7 0 WinREMS Reference to gain a complete understanding of al
245. re 7 12 to the screen See Table 7 2 for a definition of Reading Type 7 4 3 Computed Exposures If either the Glow Curves View Figure 7 9 or the Regions of Interest View Figure 7 10 is currently displayed selecting this item will bring the Computed Exposures View Figure 7 11 to the screen See Table 7 1 for a definition of Reading Type 7 4 4 First Record Previous Record Next Record Last Record Each of these will move you to another record in the selected record set as indicated by its name These functions work the same way for each view view Read Calibration Glow Curves Regions of Inberest Computed Exposure First Record Previous Record Next Record Last Record Toolbar w Status Bar Figure 7 19 View Menu 7 4 5 Tool Bar Clicking on this item will toggle the tool bar into or out of visibility A check W next to the item indicates that it is active The Tool Bar is located immediately under the Main Menu 7 4 6 Status Bar Clicking on this item will toggle the Status Bar into and out of visibility A check W next to the item indicates that it is active The Status Bar is at the very bottom of the screen Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 21 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 5 Read The dialog boxes under this menu item establish the conditions under which the Reader will read Dosimeters and initiate the read process
246. res cont d 6 2 Dosimeter Cards cont d 6 2 2 Generate Calibration Dosimeters cont d 12 13 Accept Results When you have completed the calculation process click on the Accept Button to accept the results on the screen and enter them on the database Any dosimeters falling outside the Acceptable ECC Range will be marked with an asterisk and you should physically remove them from the Calibration Dosimeter set The accepted dosimeters will be identified as Calibration Dosimeters on the ECC Database Remove Cards Remove the cards from the reader 6 2 3 Calibrate Reader This procedure establishes the Reader Calibration Factor RCF for a TTP either for a newly defined TTP or as part of a regular QA practice 1 Prepare Dosimeters Prepare and expose a subset five to ten cards of the Calibration Dosimeters according to Section 6 2 1 Prepare Dosimeters Load Dosimeters into Reader Load the TLD Cards into the Reader according to the instructions in 3 4 1 Cards Set Reader Function From the 8800 Host Main Menu Figure 8 1 select View Glow Curves to bring up the Glow Curves View Screen Figure 8 4 Set TTP From the WinREMS Main Menu select Read TTP Setup to bring the Time Temperature Profile Dialog Box Figure 7 25 into view Select the TTP you wish to calibrate or set a TTP to the conditions shown in the appropriate column of Table 6 1 Set Acquisition Parameters From the WinREMS Main M
247. rily as it Table 5 1 affects all the Reader Calibration Factors Electronics QC Values The voltage should remain within 1 of the preset value for the Reader Calibration Factor RCF to remain valid NOTE If the voltage has drifted outside of these limits or you have adjusted it you will have to generate all new RCFs Plus Minus 15 Volts are measured at the power supply for the electronics they should remain within 0 5 volts of the nominal value D A Reference is the Reference Voltage for the digital to analog conversion electronics it should be within the range of 8 183 to 8 203 to insure accurate and consistent results Ground is the reference potential of the analog signals the actual value should be zero 0 02 VDC Reference Light is the equivalent TLD measurement of the constant light output from the built in Reference Light The reading should be consistent from day to day on any given channel although it will vary from channel to channel When you first receive your Reader you should run the Electronics QC routine with enough test cycles to establish the normal range of values As a general rule you should initially set the value for one standard deviation at 10 of the observed mean As additional data is added to the Daily Quality Control Charts you may revise these limits The Reference Light value you observe while reading Field Cards should be within 20 of the mean value established from the Daily
248. rm drift in the instrument s operation and may indicate the need for periodic preventive maintenance as well as provide clues to the reason for variations in the output records Record the following readings and plot them on the Daily Control Charts PMT Noise Reference Light Reading High Voltage PMT Cooler Temperature and Peak Location and Area ratios Maintain a separate chart for each value for each TL Chip Position Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 5 2 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 5 0 Quality Assurance cont d 5 1 Daily QA cont d 5 1 2 Reader Operational Checks Before you make any operational checks power up the Reader for at least 20 minutes with gas flowing to allow temperatures to stabilize The initial operating checks make use of the Glow Curve View Screen on the Reader The instrument monitoring data are all displayed in the boxes along the left edge of the screen The following procedures check for proper functioning of the PMT Cooler and the High Voltage PMT Cooler During the warmup period observe the temperature of the PMT Assembly the Cooler Temperature on the screen it should be decreasing The temperature should stabilize in the range of 9 to 12 C High Voltage Observe and record the High Voltage readings on the Results Screen the number to the left of the letter V These values should each stay consistent within 1 volt from day to day 5 1 3 Reader C
249. roperties and Password Maintenance Selecting any of these functions will bring up the Enter Password Dialog Box Figure 7 44 Enter an acceptable user name and password and click on the OK button to bring up the selected dialog box in edit mode If you don t have a password assigned you may click the close button to access the desired screen in view mode For obvious reasons this does not apply to the Password Maintenance Dialog Box As the system is installed the default user name is system and the default Password is system We suggest that as part of your initial setup you generate at least one new user password combination with Administrator privileges and then delete the system system combination otherwise anyone who reads this manual will have access to your system From the Main Menu select Workspace Password Maintenance to bring the Enter Password Dialog Box Figure 7 44 into view After entry ofa valid Administrator Username and Password click on the OK Button to bring up the Password Maintenance Dialog Box Figure 7 45 7 9 2 1 Add a New User Click on the Add Button on the Password Maintenance Dialog Box Figure 7 45 to bring the Add a New User Dialog Box Figure 7 46 into view The fields in this box operate as follows Enter Administrator Password x Username Carol Password Cancel Help Figure 7 44 Enter Password Dialog Box Password Maintenance Xx
250. ry can be made in the Time field e If Time is selected in the Mode field an entry must be made in the Time field and no entry can be made in the Value field Value This field defines the amount of radiation to which the QC Dosimeters are exposed When you set the Exposure Mode to Value this is a data entry field Otherwise it is a display field The units of exposure as set in the Expose Setup dialog box Figure 8 20 are displayed to the right of this field Time This field defines the length of time for which the QC Dosimeters are exposed When you set the Exposure Mode to Time this is a data entry field Otherwise it is a display field Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 8 24 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 8 0 8800 Host Reference cont d 8 4 Options cont d 8 4 2 Modes cont d 8 4 2 3 Auto Blank To enable the Auto Blank dialog box Figure 8 27 the Enable Mode option on the dialog box must be selected The purpose of Auto Blank is to automate the process of annealing exposing and reading Blank Dosimeters With this feature after the Blank Dosimeters are initially loaded into the Load Cartridge they are annealed if the Pre Anneal option is selected exposed and read without further operator intervention The 8800 Host then sends the data to WinREMS and it is stored in the active Response Database Without this feature Blank Dosimeters must be
251. s in accord with Section 6 3 1 Prepare Dosimeters 2 Load Cards into Reader Load the dosimeters into Carrier Cards using only the designated calibration position and then load the Carrier Cards into the Reader 3 Table 6 5 Acquisition Setup Conditions for Generating Extremity Calibration Dosimeters Acquisition Mode Set Reader Function From the 8800 Host Main Menu Figure 8 1 select View Glow Curves to bring up the Glow Curves View Screen Figure 8 4 Set TTP From the WinREMS Main Menu select Read TTP Setup to bring the Time Temperature Profile Dialog Box Figure 7 25 into view Seta TTP to the conditions shown in the appropriate column of Table 6 1 Be sure that the TTP you select uses the Extremity Calibration Irradiation Position that you set in Section 6 3 1 Prepare Dosimeters as its only active position Set Acquisition Parameters From the WinREMS Main Menu select Read Acquisition Setup to bring the Acquisition Setup Dialog Box into view Figure 7 23 Set the parameters in this box to the conditions in Table 6 5 Generate Calibration Dosimeters Extremity Enabled Apply Calibration None Employee ID Disabled Export Format None PMT Noise Interval 10 PMT Noise Range 10 to 2000 picoCoulombs Ref Light Interval 10 Ref Light Range Varies with instrument QC Card Interval 0 QC Card Range Not applicable Blank Card Interval 0 Blank Card Range Not applicable Model 8800 Automatic TL
252. s with one unique Group ID will aid in identifying the Dosimeters in the Search Response Database Dialog Box Figure 7 8 After the readings are completed select the Group ID on the Search Response Database Dialog Box leaving all other selections set to All Highlight all the records on the resulting Response Record screen From the Main Menu click on Calibration Dosimeter Calibration to bring up the Dosimeter Calibration Dialog Box Figure 7 30 Enter the Irradiation Values and click on the Compute Button On this screen you can define the ECCs to be accepted and rejected both by setting ECC limits For more Detailed instructions see Section 6 2 4 Calibrate Dosimeters The fields on this screen operate as follows Results The upper area of the screen details the results of each dosimeter highlighted in the Search Response Database Results View Dosimeter ID This column displays the Dosimeter ID for each of the dosimeters ECC i ECC ii ECC ii ECC iv These columns display the ECC Element Correction Coefficient for each dosimeter and position All Dosimeters with all their ECCs falling between the Upper and Lower Limits as defined at the bottom of the dialog box will appear highlighted Reading Statistics The fields in this group box all relate to the readings from the dosimeters highlighted in the Search Response Database Results View Total This field displays the total number of dosimeters
253. se audible alarms so that you can recognize them by the difference in their sounds Select Options Alerts to bring the Alert Options Dialog Box Figure 8 22 into view There are three tabs on this dialog box Each tab is used to define a different type of alarm e Out of TLDs indicates that all the dosimeters in the Load Cartridges have been processed e Errors indicates that the Reader has stopped due to some operating error e Missing Id indicates that a dosimeter had an unreadable barcode When this occurs the Reader displays a dialog box Figure 8 23 for manual entry of a Dosimeter ID and element IDs if you are reading Extremity Dosimeters The Reader waits for a short period of time for a manual entry after which it will place the card in the No 8 Unload Cartridge and proceed to read the next card Alert Options Out of TLDs Errors Missing ld Frequency of Sound 00 Hertz Duration of Sound 300 milliseconds Delay between Sounds 700 milliseconds Total Time of Sound E seconds Cancel Figure 8 22 Alert Options Dialog Box ose lle H li Alerts Modes Figure 8 21 Options Menu Because the procedure for setting all three alerts is essentially similar only the Out of TLDs Alert will be described here There are four fields on this tab defined as follows Frequency of Sound This field defines the pitch of the sound in Hertz or cycles per second While values r
254. selected the values entered in the Background Residual Field will be subtracted from the computed dose The unit of measurement is that which is established in the Cs 137 Relative Response Field on the Algorithm Setup Profile Dialog Box Figure 7 35 The four Background Residual Fields represent Deep Eye Shallow and Neutron Doses Background Residual In these four fields you may enter the amount of any background you wish to subtract from the measured values Be sure that the value entered here is consistent with the length of time that the dosimeters were exposed If Raw Data was selected in the Apply Background to field the units will be gU and the raw data subtracted from the chip readings in the four positions If Computed Dose was selected in the Apply Background to Field the units will be the same as those selected in the Units Field on the ASP Dialog Box and the four values will be subtracted from the Deep Eye Shallow and Neutron Doses Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 52 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 8 Tools cont d 7 8 1 8840 Dose Computation Algorithm cont d 7 8 1 3 CSP Selecting CSP from the Win8840 Menu will bring up a prompt for Username and Password Upon entry of a valid name and password the Calculation Setup Dialog Box Figure 7 37 will appear On this dialog box you select the ASP and BSP that you wish to use for future
255. simeters Blank Cards are recognized by WinREMS and automatically read with the same TTP as they were calibrated and with RCF and ECC applied Blank Card Readings are stored in the active Response Database Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 5 8 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 5 0 Quality Assurance cont d 5 2 Online QC Tests cont d 5 2 4 QC Dosimeters QC Card Readings are readings taken of TL Cards or Extremity dosimeters that have been exposed to a known radiation QC Cards are dosimeters selected from the general population of dosimeters and are calibrated and identified as QC Cards or Dosimeters in the calibration process They are then interspersed through a group of dosimeters to be read The interval set on the Acquisition Set up Screen is a maximum interval if no QC Cards are encountered within that range the Reader will stop QC Cards and Extremity dosimeters are recognized by WinREMS and automatically read with the same TTP as they were calibrated and with RCF and ECC applied QC Card readings are stored in the active Response Database Model 8800 Automated TLD Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 6 1 Operator s Manual 6 0 Calibration Procedures 6 1 Introduction This section describes all the calibration procedures for the Model 8800 with WinREMS Full calibration requires calibrating both the Reader and all the cards in the system 6 1 1 Purpose The purpose for calibratin
256. ssume that the response of the Reader changed by a factor of C Since this change will affect all of the TL dosimeters equally then lt Q gt Cx lt Q gt 10 and q 0 q 11 when qj is the charge that would have been reported by Field Dosimeter j at the time that lt Q gt was generated and lt Q gt is the average reported charge from the Calibration Dosimeters that were exposed and read together with the Field Dosimeters whose Element Correction Coefficients have to be generated Similar to 9 Element Correction Coefficients ECC for Field Dosimeters are defined as lt p gt ECC 12 q Model 8800 Automatic TLD Reader with WinREMS Page 6 22 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 6 0 Calibration Procedures cont d 6 4 Calibration Methodology cont d 6 4 1 Element Correction Coefficients cont d Note that the ECC values for the Field Dosimeters would be the same whether generated at the same time as the Calibration Dosimeters ECCs or at another time since the C values from 10 and 11 would have been canceled out in 12 Once ECCs for the Field Dosimeters have been generated and applied their TL efficiency sensitivity is virtually equal to the mean TL efficiency of the Calibration Dosimeters and as a result all the dosimeter population will have virtually the same TL efficiency as shown in Figure 6 1 When new dosimeters are added to the population their TL efficiency can be set to be vir
257. t on the Options menu Figure 8 24 ose Mla i Alerts Modes Figure 8 24 No Mode Options Menu If your system has one or more of these optional features selecting Modes opens the Enter Password dialog box After entering valid information and clicking the OK button the Mode Options dialog box opens Figure 8 25 There are currently three Mode Options available as indicated by the three tabs on the Mode Options dialog box Your system may or may not display all three tabs A tab displays only when that option is loaded on your system Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 8 20 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 8 0 8800 Host Reference cont d 8 4 Options cont d 8 4 2 Modes cont d 8 4 2 1 Auto Calibration To enable the Auto Calibration dialog box Figure 8 25 the Enable Mode option on the dialog box must be selected The purpose of Auto Calibration is to automate the process of annealing exposing and reading dosimeters that are used for calibration purposes With this feature after the Calibration Dosimeters are initially loaded into the Load Cartridge they are annealed if the Pre Anneal option is selected exposed and read without further operator intervention The 8800 Host then sends the data to WinREMS and it is stored in the active Response Database Without this Dosimeters must be feature Calibration 1 Loaded into the Load Cartridge annealed then removed
258. t set of data to the WinREMS PC system shutdown and the ability to customize the audible alerts made by the system at various points in the operation of the Reader Operation of the 8800 Host is explained in detail in Section 8 0 8800 Host Reference Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 3 5 Operator s Manual 3 0 General Instructions cont d 3 4 TLD Handling 3 4 1 Cards The 8800 Card Reader cartridges hold up to 200 Carrier or TLD Cards All Extremity Carrier Cards as well as all 8800 and 2276 Series Cards are compatible with the 8800 Reader NOTE Earlier types of TLD Cards will not function properly in this Reader The 8800 Reader uses two types of Cartridges identified by gold and blue anodizing The blue Cartridges are for use in the Load Carrousel only They have a diagonal fillet in one corner to prevent the possibility of inserting the Cards in the wrong orientation When you hold the cartridge in a vertical position with the slot facing you you must insert the cards with the barcode side up and the cut corner of the card in the back left corner of the cartridge The gold Cartridges do not have a fillet and may be used in either Carrousel It is important however when using them on the Load Carrousel that you orient the cards correctly in the Cartridge Loading Dosimeters To process a batch of two hundred cards or less you will need three cartridges one Load Carrous
259. table ECC and cannot be used as Field Cards 13 Initiate Calculations Click on the Compute Button to calculate the ECC values All the acceptable records will be highlighted in the upper portion of the screen Note that if the dosimeters being calibrated are not of the same specification as the Calibration Dosimeters the ECCs for one or more chips may not center around 1 0 as would be the case with dosimeters with the same specification This may require that you repeat Steps 12 and 13 with different values for the Acceptable ECC Range NOTE When performing Step 14 you must ensure that no workstations are reading dosimeters with ECCs applied The calibration process takes a few seconds and no workstations are able to access the ECC Database during that time If a reader attempts to access the ECC database while it is being updated it may time out and stop operations 14 Accept Values When you are satisfied with the results click on the Accept Button to apply the data to the database 15 Remove Cards Remove the cards from the Reader Model 8800 Automatic TLD Reader with WinREMS Page 6 12 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 6 0 Calibration Procedures cont d 6 3 Extremity Dosimeters This subsection describes all the calibration procedures for an Extremity Dosimeter system An extremity system may be one workspace in a larger system These procedures are the same whether the dosimeters are Chipstrates
260. tal Photronics board If any of the fields read FAIL the problem is in the PROM chip of the Digi tal Board Replace the chip or the board Plus 15 Volt Supply and Minus 15 Volt Supply are checks of the voltage supplies powering the analog electronics The range is internally set at 1 volt If any of the fields reads FAIL in either 15 Volt test the problem is probab ly in PS3 the 5 15 VDC power supply located in the Power Supply Assembly Replace this power supply assembly Other possibilities include a bad or loose connector or a short in the system D A Reference Test checks the reference voltage of the D A converter on the Digital Photronics Board The range is set at the factory to 8 188 to 8 198 Ifany of the fields read FAIL the problem is in the D A Converter on the Digital Board Replace the board The lower portion of the screen displays the Mean and Standard Deviation of the Photronics readings and compares the results against standards established by the operator on the Electronics QC Setup Dialog Box Figure 5 2 Any value outside of its specified range will have HIGH or LOW next to it indicating a possible need for maintenance and or recalibration of the instrument Out of range values will not prohibit normal operation of the system A high or low reading may mean faulty electronics or merely a need to adjust the parameters The mean and standard deviation of all the Electr
261. ted total dosimeter population but no less than ten dosimeters is selected and retained for use as Calibration Dosimeters The dosimeters used for any regular Reader calibration procedure Section 7 6 2 Reader Calibration will be a subset of these dosimeters The procedures are basically the same for Extremity Dosimeters and TLD Cards differing only in the number of positions that are active in the TTP To generate a set of Calibration Dosimeters you must first clear them of any residual or spurious TL signal and then expose them to a known radiation On the Read Dosimeters Dialog Box Figure 7 21 assign a Group Identification and select the desired TTP Select an Acquisition Setup which has the Mode set to Generate Calibration Dosimeters and the ECC and RCF not applied Click on Start to initiate the Read process For this procedure all the Calibration Dosimeters can be read with the same Group ID as this will aid in identifying the dosimeters in the Search Response Database Dialog Box Figure 7 8 When the read process is completed use the Search Function to select all the readings based on the Group Assignment and highlight all the records Click on Calibration Generate Calibration Dosimeters to bring up the Generate Calibration Dosimeters Dialog Box Figure7 28 Click on the Compute Button to calculate ECCs and display all the readings For more detailed procedural i Calibration QC Tools Workspace Wind Generate Ca
262. ted by Date edited These two fields display when by whom the ASP in view was last changed using the Username entered in the Password prompt Name You may enter any name you wish to identify a profile you create Comments In this optional field you may enter any comment you wish to describe the nature or application of the profile you are creating Edited by system Date edited 2 25 Comments 30 day average Apply Background to i Background Residual 5 12 OK Cancel Delete Raw Data 5 43 5 59 Computed Dose iii iy Units te Figure 7 36 Background Setup Dialog Box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 51 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 8 Tools cont d 7 8 1 8840 Dose Computation Algorithm cont d 7 8 1 2 BSP cont d Apply background to Background radiation may be subtracted at either of two points in the calculation as determined by the selection made on these radio buttons Raw Data When this option is selected the values entered in the Background Residual Field represent raw data readings as received from the TLD Reader The units are generic units gU as defined in the Time Temperature Profile These values will be subtracted from the data before the algorithm computation The four Background Residual Fields represent the four TLD Chip positions on the TLD Card Computed Dose When this option is
263. th WinREMS Page 0 8 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual ILLUSTRATIONS Figure Page 1 1 Typical Model 8800 Workstation 1 1 1 2 Card Reader Block Diagram 1 2 1 3 Typical Dosimeter Card ta e ed 1 4 1 4 Dosimeter Holder knna el ee GALA Pd aa 1 4 1 5 Holder Opener 4 20 ceo gee idas 1 5 1 6 Type 8814 Whole Body Dosimeter 1 5 1 7 Type 8807 Environmental Dosimeter 1 6 1 8 CIPSA SOROS NGAY 1 7 1 9 Chipstrate Strap tas paa oles Shue oe Pet an 1 8 1 10 Chipstrate Carrier Card asii hake bas 1 8 1 11 DXT RAD Extremity dosimeter 1 9 3 1 Results Serene sr ANNA SAA Pee a 3 3 3 2 Carrousel Control Dialog BOX 3 5 3 3 DXT RAD Extremity Dosimeter 3 7 3 4 Ringlet Assembly Disassembly Fixture 3 7 3 5 Ringlet Carrier Card pasma fae bie owes aoe es 3 7 3 6 Chipstrate and Pouch 0 0000000 ee 3 6 3 7 Chipstrate Carrier Card ula thane ew vee 3 6 4 1 Expose Initiate Dialog Box o o oo o 4 1 5 1 Electronics QC Test Results 5 3 5 2 Electronics QC Setup Dialog Box 5 6 6 1 Internal Calibration of a TLD System 6 22 7 1 Fil NGI sa ia a 7 1 7 2 Main Menu and Toolbar 0 005 7 1 7 3 Workspace Wizard ana ad dass Cade ee ks 7 2 7 4 Import TTP Log Report BOX coins 7 3 7 5 Export Response Record Dialog Box 7 4 7 6 Edit Men sgae aa a e
264. the quality assurance measures available in the system and Section 6 0 Calibration Procedures to calibrate your Reader and dosimeters for production use e If you have received your system completely installed and operational you may begin with Sections 3 0 General Instructions and 4 0 Tutorial to familiarize yourself with the general operation of the Reader Section 5 0 Quality Assurance to understand the quality assurance measures available in the system and Section 6 0 Calibration Procedures to calibrate your Reader for production use e If you are a new operator coming into a system that is fully operational you will initially benefit most from Sections 3 0 General Instructions and 4 0 Tutorial Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 0 2 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual FOREWORD cont d Overview cont d e If you are familiar with this model Reader but need occasional reference to specific fields or procedures then Sections 7 0 WinREMS Reference and 8 0 8800 Host Reference will serve as a reference for you possibly in conjunction with Section 9 0 Index to help you find the exact topic you need The following is a brief overview of the sections in this manual Section 1 0 System Overview provides a description of the dosimeters and the complete Model 8800PC workstation and its functions and capabilities Section 2 0 Installation provides an overview of the environment required and
265. the Enter Password Dialog Box into view Figure 7 44 Entering a valid User Name and Password will allow you access to the Acquisition Setup Dialog Box in edit mode Figure 7 23 The parameters on this screen control many aspects of the operation of the Reader as it reads the cards You may change any of these fields without affecting the TTP calibration values 2 Select Title If you intend to use an existing setup click on the arrow in the Title Field and select the setup you wish to use If you wish to create a new setup select new Setup and edit the title to a new name This will be the identification of the setup that you will create The Date Edited and Edited by Fields will be filled automatically using the computer s internal clock and the name entered in the Username Field of the Enter Password Dialog Box Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 4 4 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 4 0 Tutorial cont d 4 2 Data Acquisition cont d 4 2 2 Acquisition Setup cont d 3 Select Acquisition Mode This field defines the purpose for which the dosimeters will be read It is impor tant to set this correctly as the data can not be used for any purpose other than what is set in this field For purposes of this tutorial select Read Dosimeters Confirm that the Extremity Checkbox is not checked Set Apply Calibration In this box you may set either or both Calibration Factors to be
266. the current workspace by selecting the appropriate tab as described in the following subsections There are three buttons at the bottom of this dialog box that are common for all tabs and operate as follows OK Clicking on this button accepts the changes you have made and closes the dialog box This makes the changes workspace window Help Properties Password Maintenance Figure 7 38 Workspace Menu Apply This button will activate the changes you have made but will not close the box 7 9 1 1 Instrument Select the Instrument Tab to view the Reader related features that can be changed in the workspace Figure 7 39 The fields on this box operate as follows Instrument Model A series of option buttons identifies the Reader model that will be used with this workspace Be sure this is selected correctly as it impacts the control signals sent to the Reader and the format of the data that is received by WinREMS Workspace Properties x Print Computed Exposure Print Regions of Interest Print ECCs Print Electronics QC Print Log Instrument Databases Files Password Print Glowcurves effective for as long as the workspace is open To save the changes permanently you must use either the Save Workspace or the Save Workspace As commands on the File item on the Main Menu Section 7 1 1 Workspace Instrument Model C M3500 M4500 M5500 C M6600 C M8800 Cancel This button closes the
267. the desired exposure Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 4 2 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 4 0 Tutorial cont d 4 1 Expose TLDs cont d 5 Expose Dosimeters Click on the Start button to direct the instrument to start irradiating dosimeters The Exposing Cards Dialog Box Figure 8 19 will appear reporting progress of the irradiation process Remove Dosimeters After all the dosimeters in the Load Cartridge have been exposed you may remove the dosimeters from the instrument 7 View Print Report Select View Expose from the Main Menu to see the Expose Log View Screen This will display a listing of all the dosimeters exposed in this procedure Note that this represents only the current exposures old data is not stored Click on the Print Icon to print the report Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 4 3 Operator s Manual 4 0 Tutorial cont d 4 2 Data Acquisition This section describes the complete process of reading a set of TL Cards or extremity dosimeters including reviewing the Time Temperature Profile TTP establishing the Acquisition Setup and acquiring the data Any differences in procedure for reading different types of TLD or Carrier Cards will be explained 4 2 1 Time Temperature Profile 1 Get Time Temperature Profile Setup Dialog Box From the WinREMS Main Menu select Read TTP Setup or click the TTP Button on the
268. the right of the year To change the time of day click in the time edit box highlighting the number you want to change You can then either enter the new value directly from the keyboard or increment decrement the value using the up and down arrows to the right of the field To change between AM and PM highlight that portion of the time field and click either the up or the down arrow After setting the time click Apply to re set the computer s clock or click OK to save any changes and close the dialog box Click the Time Zone Tab to bring up the Time Zone Dialog Box Figure 8 14 where you can change your local time zone or the set Daylight Savings Time To change the time zone click the down arrow to the right of the Time Zone Field and select the desired time zone from the drop down list You can accomplish the same thing by clicking on the light band indicating the current time zone and dragging it the desired map location Page 8 11 Date Time Properties 21x Date amp Time Time Zone m Date Time REE fur y AS Ki a 16 3 455 a 7 8 9 1011 12 13 2 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 E 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Bees 28 29 30 12 02 52PM 24 Current time zone Eastern Daylight Time Cancel Apply Figure 8 13 Date Time Dialog Box Date Time Properties 7 x Date amp Time TimeZone GMT 05 00 Eastern Time US amp Canada IV Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes Cancel
269. then this feature cannot be used and the QC Dosimeters are read only once in the mode displayed in the Acquisition Mode field on the WinREMS Acquisition Setup dialog box Figure 7 23 Acquisition Mode The Acquisition Modes that are selected enabled on the Auto QC dialog box determine the types of readings that can be executed However to be executed the selected Acquisition Mode must match the Acquisition Mode field on the WinREMS Acquisition Setup dialog box Figure 7 23 Mode Options Lx Auto Calibration Auto OC Auto Blank Disable Mode Enable Mode r Acquisition Mode V Calibrate Reader IV Read Dosimeters I Calibrate Extremity Reader T Read Extremity T Anneal Dosimeters Iv Anneal Extremity gt Pre Anneal Disable Enable Exposure Mode Value Value s00 gu seconds E Cancel Figure 8 26 Auto QC Dialog Box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 8 23 Operator s Manual 8 0 8800 Host Reference cont d 8 4 Options cont d 8 4 2 Modes cont d 8 4 2 2 Auto QC cont d In the Auto QC dialog box all the Acquisition Modes that you expect to use can be selected and left on Any Acquisition Mode that is not selected is considered disabled If none of these Acquisition Modes are selected then the QC Dosimeters are read only once in the mode displayed in the Acquisition Mode field on the Acquisiti
270. tion and Management System WinREMS consists of a series of programs and databases direct the operation of the Reader through the 8800 Host computer receive dosimetry records from the reader then stores retrieves and processes them and presents the data in meaningful forms These processes are directed through a series of menus and dialog boxes which are described in detail in Section 7 0 WinREMS Reference This section provides you with the information necessary to start the system navigate through the screens enter data get help and exit the WinREMS software 3 1 1 Mouse Support WinREMS supports the use of a Microsoft or compatible mouse Terms used commonly in this manual in describing the operation of a mouse are as follows Click means to push down on the left mouse button and release it immediately without moving the arrow Double Click means to push down on the left mouse button and release it immediately twice in quick succession without moving the arrow Drag means to click and hold the left mouse button down while moving the pointer across the screen to a new location and release the button Hover means to hold the arrow in one place on the screen In a field that responds to hovering additional data will appear Right Click means to push down on the right mouse button and release it immediately without moving the arrow 3 1 2 Highlighting Records On many screens which list rec
271. tory Queue These four views are all selected from the View option on the horizontal menu at the top of the screen The Glow Curve view Figure 8 4 displays glow curve data as it is being generated and is the view that must be on the screen when dosimeters are being read It simultaneously displays the TL intensity in nanoamperes and hot gas temperature C as a function of time as measured by progress through the 200 channels of data in a glow curve in graphical form for all four TL positions The Expose Log View Figure 8 5 lists the last batch of cards that was exposed to the Internal Irradiator The Transport Maintenance View Figure 8 6 shows the present status of many of the sensors in the Transport Subsystem It also enables you to selectively exercise many of the commands that are normally executed as part of the process of reading a group of cards This feature is primarily for maintenance and diagnostic purposes The History Queue screen Figure 8 7 displays a history of the operation of the Transport Subsystem as directed by the Host Computer The Carrousel Control Dialog Box Figure 8 12 may be accessed from any View Screen and is used to rotate the carrousels to any position to load and unload the card cartridges A third Main Menu item Expose is used to expose cards to the Internal Irradiator if one is installed in the Reader Other functions controlled from the 8800 Host include retransmitting the las
272. trol Q D TLD Card or unmounted dosimeter X Extremity Chipstrate or Ringlet For PMT Noise and Ref Light Readings third letter is the same as it is for the Table 7 1 Reading Types Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 13 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 3 Search cont d 7 3 1 Response Database cont d 7 3 1 2 Computed Exposure cont d on the Glow Curve View Records highlighted on the Glow Curve View will also be highlighted in these two views You may print or export all the selected records or a highlighted subset of the records in a variety of formats by following the instructions in the corresponding subsection of the File Menu Section 7 1 File E Regions of Interest 1 7 3 1 3 Regions of Interest The column definitions in this view Figure 7 12 are the same as those in the Computed Exposures View Section 7 3 1 2 Computed Exposures For each dosimeter there is also an additional line for each ROI All other features including highlighting and printing are the same as for the Computed Exposures View Ox Computed Exposure X Date Time TTP Reading Dosimeter Subject ID m 05 11 00 04 48 05 PM 1 RFD 9046126 RON Rol2 ROI ROI ECC RCF 05 11 00 04 49 19 PM 9046474 Figure 7 12 Response Record Regions of Interest View Chipstrates Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREM
273. tually equal to the existing dosimeter population by generating ECCs for the new dosimeters The only parameter which must remain constant is the inherent sensitivity of the Calibration Field Cards 100 Dosimeters that are being used Extensive testing by Thermo Electron Corp RM amp P and by our customers has shown however that the TL dosimeters used here can be subjected to hundreds of reuse cycles without any noticeable change in their TL efficiency Note that the radiation source used for generating the ECCs for the Field Dosimeters does not have to be the same one used for generating the ECCs for the Calibration Dosimeters provided that a subset of Calibration Dosimeters is exposed to the same radiation field as the Field Dosimeters whose ECCs are being generated Also note that there is no need for the dosimeters to be mounted in their holders during irradiation since the only purpose of this irradiation is to induce an excitation in the TL material which will result in a measurable TL signal that is proportional to the TL efficiency of the TL dosimeter Furthermore no attempt has been made yet to correlate this TL response to any kind of real dose units Calibration Cards 20 150 0 SENSITIVITY ARB UNITS Figure 6 1 Internal Calibration of a TLD System Model 8800 Automatic TLD Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 6 23 Operator s Manual 6 0 Calibration Procedures cont d 6 4 Calibration Meth
274. turn to the Search results and change the dosimeter set and recompute the RCF as many times as you wish Accept Clicking on this button will accept the RCFs displayed in the Pending Fields They will become the Active RCFs for future calculations Close Clicking on this button will close this dialog box without saving any changes made since the Accept Button was clicked Help Clicking on this button will activate the help system for this dialog box You may print a report of the calibration results using the print function on the File menu Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 7 42 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 6 Calibration cont d 7 6 3 Dosimeter Calibration This option creates an Element Correction Coefficient ECC for each dosimeter in the system The ECC is a measure of the TL sensitivity of each dosimeter relative to the average sensitivity of all the Calibration Dosimeters in the system To calibrate a group Dosimeters you must first clear them of any residual or spurious TL signal and then expose them to a known radiation On the Read Dosimeters Dialog Box Figure 7 21 assign a Group Identification select the desired TTP select an Acquisition Setup which has the Mode set to Calibrate Dosimeters and the Apply Calibration Fields set to apply RCF Click on Start to initiate the Read process For this procedure reading all the Dosimeter
275. ubset of a or a complete Response Database record To select the fields to be exported the label for each data field of interest is entered into the Export Configuration File The order top to bottom of field labels in the Export Configuration File determines the order left to right of data fields in the Export File It is not necessary to identify which section of the Response record a given export field comes from nor is it necessary for the Export Record to follow the sequence of the Response Record Compare Figures 1 and 2 to see a Configuration File and its resultant Export File Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page A 11 Operator s Manual Appendix B ASCII Export File 2 0 Customizing The Export File cont d 2 2 Output Format Specification If desired a format other than the default format can be specified for some or all of the selected fields This is done by writing a format specification after each data field label Otherwise the WinREMS default format is applied to that field The configuration specification for the standard ASCII Export File is stored in the Export Configuration File Figure 1 or 3 supplied as a part of the initial WinREMS installation Note that some data field labels are followed by a format specification The syntax that must be used in the format specification for each field in the Common Section is flag width precision variable type
276. ults 8 2 4 Retransmit Results Select Control Retransmit Results to bring the Retransmit Results Dialog Box Figure 8 15 into view This feature is used to send the last record generated to the WinREMS PC in the event of a communications failure before the record can be transmitted normally This might be as a result of a power failure on a WinREMS PC without an Uninterruptible Power Supply a broken cable or a failure in the PC The last record is always maintained in the 8800 Reader to make it available for this purpose Should such a failure occur when you attempt to start reading again WinREMS will display the message Last acquired Response Record was not transmitted Use Retransmit Results Function After pressing the Retransmit button you must go the WinREMS PC and initiate the read process using the same Function and Group Number as when the reading was taken If for any reason you do not wish to retransmit the last record press the Cancel button to return to normal operation Otherwise the message will reappear every time you attempt a read function If you attempt to retransmit a record that already exists on the WinREMS database you will get the error message duplicate key from the WinREMS database system and WinREMS will terminate the acquisition program Cancel Help To retransmit the last acquired response record press the RETRANSMIT button and then initiate the Read function of your data
277. urrent card Card ID This field displays the identification number of the card including Carrier Cards being exposed EXT RAD and DXT RAD IDs are not displayed Cartridge Number This field displays the position on the Carrousel from which cards are being irradiated STOP EXPOSURE This button can be used to stop the expose process at any time When you click this button the expose process will stop at the end of the current cycle and the same button will read Continue enabling you to restart if you wish without terminating the current listing To completely terminate the process select another view screen Status Messages are displayed in the top field on the Exposing Cards Dialog Box These messages are based on the state of the two shutter sensors built into the Shutter mechanism and the current command from the gt DOSIMETER IS BEING EXPOSED lt Exposure Value 500 gu Exposure Time 50 69 seconds Exposing Card Number Card ID Cartridge Number 0005601 STOP EXPOSURE Figure 8 19 Exposing Cards Dialog Box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 8 16 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 8 0 8800 Host Reference cont d 8 3 Expose Function cont d 8 3 1 Initiate cont d software One sensor is tripped when the Shutter is in the open position the other is tripped when the Shutter is in the closed position If neither sensor is tripped the shutter
278. utton leads to an alphabetical list of all the Dialog Boxes and Screens in WinREMS Clicking on any of these titles will bring a full description of the selected item into view Help Help Topics Version Information About WinREMS Figure 7 49 Help Menu Menu Bar and Tool Bar This button leads to a graphic of the Main Menu and Toolbar You may click on any area of the Main Menu or Toolbar for a complete description of the selected function Tutorials This button leads to an alphabetical list of the tutorials in the system Clicking on any of these titles will bring the selected tutorial into view Figure 7 50 WinREMS Help Home Page Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 7 61 Operator s Manual 7 0 WinREMS Reference cont d 7 11 Help cont d 7 11 2 Version Information Clicking on Help Version Information will bring into view a screen with a list of the changes in each revision level of WinREMS as well as helpful information not contained in this manual 7 11 3 About Clicking on Help About will bring the About WinREMS Dialog Box Figure 7 51 into view This box displays the part number and version of the WinREMS package you are using Clicking on the Toolbar button with the yellow question mark will bring up the same box About WinREMS Ea WinREMS Version PL 26732 002 Copyright 1999 2000 Bicron All rights reserved Figure 7 51 About WinREMS D
279. w Screen Text 8 8 Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 0 10 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual ILLUSTRATIONS cont d Figure Page 8 8 History Queue View Screen Hex 8 8 8 9 Print Dialog BOX on pna thks MA eS ANNA 8 9 8 10 Print Setup Dialog Box 00 00 0000 8 9 8 11 Control Menu 0 00 fea ee ei ad ea de eee 8 10 8 12 Carrousel Control Dialog Box 8 10 8 13 Date Time Dialog box 00000000 8 11 8 14 Time Zone Dialog BOX vita ANG 8 11 8 15 Retransmit Results Dialog Box 8 12 8 16 Shutdown Control Dialog Box 8 13 8 17 Expose Menu i cA es eel pa ta Ba a ad Pan ad 8 14 8 18 Expose Setup Dialog Box 8 14 8 19 Exposing Cards Dialog Box 8 15 8 20 Expose Setup Dialog Box ooooo o o 8 17 8 21 Options Menu 11 NE DN GNUNG 8 18 8 22 Alert Options Dialog Box a 8 18 8 23 Missing Dosimeter Identification Dialog Box 8 18 8 24 No Mode Options Menu 0 005 8 19 8 25 Auto Calibration Dialog Box 8 20 8 26 Auto QC Dialog Box o oooooomommomo o 8 22 8 27 Auto Blank Dialog Box oo oooooo o 8 24 8 28 Help Mentes 8 27 8 29 Revision LoS aaa cd ek Ma ab Meee 8 27 8 30 About Model 8800 cutis pu pa ed 8 27 Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 0 11 Operator s Manual
280. with C 14 to produce a constant light output These Reference Lights are in the Shuttle and are moved under the PMTs The readings are taken for 10 seconds In addition to the frequency established in the Interval Field Reference Light Readings are taken at the beginning and end of each Group of dosimeters Reference Light Readings are reported in nanocoulombs The absolute value of the readings is not significant but consistency of the readings is important For example a steady drift down in the readings may indicated that foreign material is accumulating on the PMT lens or Cleanout Drawer Windows The Reference Light Readings are recorded in the active Response Database 5 2 3 Blank Cards Blank Card Readings are readings taken of TL Cards or Chipstrates that have not been exposed to any known radiation Blank Cards are dosimeters selected from the general population of dosimeters and are calibrated and identified as Blank Cards in the calibration process They are then interspersed through a group of cards to be read The interval set on the Acquisition Set up Screen is a maximum interval if no Blank Cards are encountered within that range the Reader will stop You may use Blank Cards or Chipstrates as Control Dosimeters by packing and transporting them with Field Dosimeters but not issuing them to wearers You may also use them to measure the total noise in the system by annealing them and then reading them with other do
281. xposure by processing them through a Reader with the appropriate TTP Table 6 1 2 Store Dosimeters Between preparation anneal and irradiation store the dosimeters in a subdued UV environment at a temperature no higher than 30 C 3 Expose Dosimeters Expose the Dosimeters to a known radiation source e g 500 mR of Cs within two hours of annealing them 4 Store Dosimeters Store the Dosimeters for the time established above in a subdued UV environment at a temperature no higher than 30 C 5 Read Dosimeters The Dosimeters may now be read for calibration purposes Model 8800 Automatic TLD Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 6 5 Operator s Manual 6 0 Calibration Procedures cont d 4 6 2 Dosimeter Cards cont d 6 2 2 Generate Calibration Dosimeters This section describes the specific steps to generate Calibration Dosimeters regardless oftype These cards typically constitute 1 2 of the entire population and are retained at the dosimetry center for use in instrument 5 calibration With a new Reader the creation ofa set of Calibration Dosimeters will initiate the Database No special action on the part of the operator is required 1 Prepare Dosimeters Prepare and expose the dosimeters in 6 accord with Section 6 2 1 Prepare Dosimeters 2 Load Cards into Reader Load the TLD Cards into the Reader according to the instructions in 3 4 1 Cards 3 Set Reader Function From the 8800 Host Main Me
282. y of the operator with respect to this product The responsibility for any safety consequences as a result of erroneous data lies solely with the operator NOTE notices always appear in italics Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 0 14 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual SAFETY SYMBOLS The following symbols may appear on the Reader Caution ISO 3864 No B 3 1 This symbol designates possible hazards both mechanical and electrical Caution Hot Surface IEC 417 No 5041 The above symbol designates an accessible hot surface with which the operator could come in contact Protective conductor Terminal IEC 417 No 5019 This symbol designates the ground terminal for the mains protective ground The wiring should be green yellow in color Caution risk of electric shock ISO 3864 No B 3 6 This symbol designates a high voltage connection or an exposure to working voltage 3 The symbol with accompanying verbiage indicates the presence of radioactive material CE This symbol designates this instrument as being compliant with the CE requirements described on Page 0 13 of this manual Please follow all safety warnings both on the Reader and in the manuals Failure to operate the Reader in the manner specified by the manufacturer may impair the safety protections built into the equipment Model 8800 Automatic TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 0 15 Operator s Manual EUR
283. y the barcode readings from the most recently scanned card The Card Id Field shows the barcode ID from the Card itself If you are reading extremity dosimeters this will be the ID of the Carrier Card The remaining fields that are filled in this box depend on the type of dosimeter you are reading If you are reading Whole Body or Environmental Cards only the Card ID Field will be filled If you are reading Chipstrates EXT RAD Dosimeters positions ii and iii should be filled provided you are reading two Chipstrates in the Carrier Cards If you are reading DXTRAD Extremity Dosimeters the four Element Fields indicate the ID of individual TL elements Any position for which there is no ID will appear blank Depending on the software version in your Reader this box may not be operational GAS The five fields in this box indicate the command status either on or off for each of the gas valves in the system Because this is the status of the software command and not a sensor status a mechanical problem with a valve will not be evident from this screen The Supply valve indicates the sensor status of the main supply valve for the Reader It must be open for the Reader to operate The Valve 1 2 3 4 Fields show the command status not a sensor reading of the four valves that control the flow of heated gas to the four TL elements These should all display off except during a read cycle or when controlled from this scr
284. yed in the Acquisition Mode field on the Acquisition Setup dialog box Figure 7 23 Mode Options Eg Auto Calibration Auto QC Auto Blank C Disable Mode Enable Mode m Acquisition Mode I Generate Cal Dosimeters M Calibrate Reader W Calibrate Dosimeters IV Generate Cal Extremity I Calibrate Extremity Reader M Calibrate Extremity gt Pre Anneal Disable Enable Exposure Mode Value Value 500 gu Time E 00 44 seconds A Cancel Apply Help Figure 8 25 Auto Calibration Dialog Box Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS 8800 W 0 0802 Page 8 21 Operator s Manual 8 0 8800 Host Reference cont d 8 4 Options cont d 8 4 2 Modes cont d 8 4 2 1 Auto Calibration cont d Pre Anneal These two radio buttons determine whether the dosimeters used for calibration will first be annealed When this option is Enable each Calibration Dosimeter is annealed to remove any residual signal before it is exposed and read If this option is Disable the Calibration Dosimeters are not annealed before being exposed and read Exposure These three fields are used to set the amount of exposure that the Calibration Dosimeters receive Note The Exposure parameters on the Auto Calibration dialog box are independent of any parameters set in the Expose Initiate dialog box Figure 8 18 The setup parameters on the Expose Setup di
285. z C Landscape Button to re set the default number of copies to be printed Cancel 8 1 6 3 Print Preview Figure 8 10 Print Setup Dialog Box This command displays the report in the format in which it will be printed Model 8800 Automated TLD Card Reader with WinREMS Page 8 10 8800 W 0 0802 Operator s Manual 8 0 8800 Host Reference cont d 8 2 Control Functions There are six functions available from the Main Menu Figure 8 11 that control different aspects of the operation of the Reader They are described in the following sections 8 2 1 Carrousels Select Control Carrousels to bring up the Carrousel Control Dialog Box Figure 8 12 From this dialog box you can control the positions of the Load and Unload Carrousels typically for loading and unloading dosimeters The fields in this box are structured into three logical groups Carrousel The three buttons in this box Unload Both and Load define which Carrousel s you will be moving with the other commands in this dialog box Move Cartridge to Home The eight buttons in this box define which Cartridge you want to move to the Home Position for the Carrousel s identified in the Carrousel Box The Home Position is defined as the Carrousel Position immediately in behind the door This is the position in which Cartridges can be inserted and removed Move by One The two buttons in this box Advance and Reverse will move the Carrousel s se

Acrobat Distiller, Job 3

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents